WO2021042387A1 - 一种通信方法、装置及设备 - Google Patents

一种通信方法、装置及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021042387A1
WO2021042387A1 PCT/CN2019/104769 CN2019104769W WO2021042387A1 WO 2021042387 A1 WO2021042387 A1 WO 2021042387A1 CN 2019104769 W CN2019104769 W CN 2019104769W WO 2021042387 A1 WO2021042387 A1 WO 2021042387A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user identity
user
terminal device
cell
identity
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/104769
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张宏平
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2019/104769 priority Critical patent/WO2021042387A1/zh
Publication of WO2021042387A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021042387A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02—Terminal devices
    • H04W88/06—Terminal devices adapted for operation in multiple networks or having at least two operational modes, e.g. multi-mode terminals
    • Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02D—CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES IN INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES [ICT], I.E. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGIES AIMING AT THE REDUCTION OF THEIR OWN ENERGY USE
    • Y02D30/00—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks
    • Y02D30/70—Reducing energy consumption in communication networks in wireless communication networks

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of mobile communication technology, and in particular to a communication method, device and equipment.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • DSSS dual SIM single standby
  • DSDS dual SIM dual standby
  • DSDA dual Card dual active
  • DSSS means that although there are two SIM cards in the terminal device, they can only reside in the communication system to which one SIM card belongs at the same time. At different times, users can choose to reside in the communication system to which different SIM cards belong.
  • DSDS means that the terminal device can reside in the communication system to which two SIM cards belong at the same time, but the communication system to which only one SIM card belongs can be in communication at the same time. For example, when one SIM card is used to surf the Internet, the other SIM card cannot be used to answer calls.
  • DSDA means that the terminal device can not only reside in the communication system to which multiple SIM cards belong at the same time, but also can communicate in the communication system to which multiple SIM cards belong at the same time. For example, when one SIM card is used to surf the Internet, another SIM card can also be used. answer the phone.
  • the two SIM cards may belong to the same operator. However, the two SIM cards still need to perform cell selection or reselection processes independently, which consumes a lot of power for terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a communication method, device, and equipment, which are used to reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment.
  • a first communication method is provided.
  • the method can be applied to a terminal device.
  • the terminal device supports a first user identity and a second user identity.
  • the method includes: staying in a first user identity as the first user identity. Cell, and camping on the first cell as the second user; determining to change the serving cell to the second cell; changing the serving cell to the second cell as the first user; and, as the first user 2.
  • the user identity changes the serving cell to the second cell, where the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same.
  • the method may be executed by a first communication device, and the first communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip system set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • both user identities can be changed.
  • Serve the cell and continue to change to the same cell then the identities of the two users do not have to perform measurement or judgment for determining cell change (for example, cell reselection, cell selection, or cell handover, etc.), but the terminal device performs a corresponding response
  • the process of cell replacement that needs to be performed is reduced, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • determining to change the serving cell to the second cell includes:
  • the terminal device is in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state as the first user, and is in the RRC inactive state as the second user. In the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state.
  • a terminal device in an idle state or in an RRC inactive state resides in a cell
  • the terminal device may need to be changed to another cell with a higher priority or better signal to camp on.
  • an idle or RRC inactive terminal device resides in a cell
  • the serving cell of the terminal device may be unavailable or unsuitable for continuing to reside, then the terminal device needs to be changed to The appropriate cell is camped on, and this is the cell selection process.
  • Cell selection is a process of finding a suitable cell as soon as possible
  • cell reselection is a process of selecting a more suitable cell.
  • changing the serving cell may refer to
  • the determination to reselect the second cell through the cell reselection process, or the determination to select the second cell through the cell selection process, is not specifically limited.
  • the cell reselection process is performed based on the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, and the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is based on the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and/or the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the private cell reselection priority configuration information is determined; among them,
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the first user
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the second user.
  • the access network device may only send one set of configuration information to the terminal device, then the terminal device will only receive one set of configuration information.
  • the access network device only sends the first private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the first user identity, but does not send the second private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, then the terminal If the device only receives the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the first user, and does not receive the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the second user, the terminal device can reselect the first dedicated cell
  • the priority configuration information obtains the third private cell reselection priority configuration information; or, the access network device only sends the second private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, but not the first user identity If the terminal device sends the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, the terminal device will only receive the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the second user, and will not receive the first set
  • the terminal device can receive the two sets of configuration information. For example, if the access network device sends the first private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the first user identity, and sends the second private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, the terminal device The first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be received as the first user, and the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be received as the second user.
  • the terminal device can obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, or obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority according to the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information Configuration information, or, obtaining the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the terminal device may randomly select the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information or the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information; or, the SIM corresponding to the first user identity If one of the SIM cards corresponding to the card and the second user identity is the primary card and the other is the secondary card, the terminal device can select the private cell reselection priority configuration information corresponding to the primary card as the third private cell reselection priority configuration Information, or select the dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information corresponding to the secondary card as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device performs cell reselection, it can perform it according to the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, so that it can camp on a cell with a higher priority as much as possible.
  • determining to camp on the second cell through a cell selection process includes:
  • Cell selection is performed with the identity of the first user and/or the identity of the second user, and the second cell is determined to be selected.
  • the terminal device may not perform cell selection with any user identity and determine to select the second cell, that is, the terminal device may directly perform cell selection and determine to select the second cell.
  • the terminal device may also perform cell selection as the first user and determine to select the second cell, or the terminal device may also perform cell selection as the second user and determine to select the second cell.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell selection process only once, and there is no need to perform the cell selection process separately with different user identities, which reduces the cell selection process that needs to be performed, and helps reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also perform cell selection as the first user and determine to select the second cell, and perform cell selection as the second user and determine to select the second cell.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell selection process with two user identities, which can make the result of the selection (the second cell) more accurate.
  • determining to camp on the second cell through a cell reselection process includes:
  • the terminal device may not perform cell reselection as any user and determine to reselect to the first cell, that is, the terminal device may directly perform cell reselection and determine to reselect to the second cell; or, The terminal device may also perform cell reselection as the first user and determine to reselect to the second cell; or, the terminal device may also perform cell reselection as the second user and determine to reselect to the second cell.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell reselection process only once, and there is no need to perform the cell reselection process separately with different user identities, which reduces the cell reselection process that needs to be performed, and helps reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device may also perform cell reselection as the first user and determine to reselect to the second cell, and perform cell reselection as the second user and determine to reselect to the second cell.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell reselection process with two user identities, which can make the result of the reselection (second cell) more accurate.
  • determining to change the serving cell to the second cell includes:
  • the RRC connected state is in the RRC connected state, the RRC idle state, or the RRC inactive state as the second user.
  • the terminal device may determine to switch to the second cell as the first user identity.
  • the first message may be a handover command, because the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the first user, and is in the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state as the second user. Therefore, the access network device may send the first message to The terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device can receive the first message from the access network device as the first user identity.
  • the first message may indicate to change the cell to the second cell as the first user.
  • the changing of the cell to the second cell as the first user mentioned here may refer to the handover to the second cell as the first user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and the method further includes:
  • the terminal device when entering the RRC connected state as the first user, the terminal device can stop using the first user status.
  • the second user identity performs cell reselection or cell selection, for example, stops performing measurement as the second user identity to stop performing cell reselection or cell selection as the second user identity. If the terminal device does not perform cell reselection or cell selection as the second user before entering the RRC connected state as the first user, it will enter the RRC connected state as the first user (or, as the first user). After the identity enters the RRC connected state), the terminal device does not perform cell reselection or cell selection as the second user.
  • the terminal device does not perform cell reselection or cell selection as the second user. This process can occur before or after the terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the first user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connection state as the first user identity, so the second user identity can follow the first user identity to change the serving cell. For example, when the terminal device determines to change the serving cell to the second cell as the first user identity, the terminal device It can also be determined to switch to the second cell for camping as the second user identity.
  • the terminal device does not need to perform cell selection or reselection with the identity of the second user, which reduces the process of cell selection or reselection of the terminal device, saves the power consumption of the terminal device, and can ensure that the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user are always Have the same serving cell.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and the method further includes:
  • the terminal device resides in the second cell as the second user. If the terminal device wants to enter the RRC connection state as the second user, the terminal device can directly establish a connection with the second cell as the second user, thereby ensuring the first The first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the second user, and the method further includes:
  • the first message carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct to change the serving cell of the first user identity and the second user identity to the second cell.
  • the terminal device can more clearly know how to change the cell for the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the first indication information only indicates to change the cell to the second cell, but does not specifically indicate whether the first user identity changes the cell or the second user identity changes the cell. Because the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, the terminal device can clearly change both the first user identity and the second user identity to the second cell according to the first indication information.
  • the access network device since the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the first user and is also in the RRC connected state as the second user, the access network device only needs to send the first message to the terminal device once, and the first message includes the first message.
  • the indication information the terminal equipment can be instructed to change the serving cell with two user identities, without the need for the access network equipment to send the first message to different user identities, thereby saving signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • both the first identifier and the second identifier may be C-RNTI.
  • the first identifier is the C-RNTI of the first user identity, such as C-RNTI 1
  • the second identifier is the C-RNTI of the second user identity, such as C-RNTI 2.
  • the C-RNTI can only be obtained by the terminal device after the user identity enters the RRC connected state. Therefore, the terminal device can use the latter user identity that enters the RRC connected state to send the second indication information to the network device.
  • the terminal device can obtain C-RNTI 1 after the first user identity enters the RRC connected state, and enters the RRC connection state under the second user identity After the state, the C-RNTI 2 can be obtained, and the terminal device can send the second indication information to the network device as the second user.
  • the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, so that it can also be determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the method further includes:
  • each user identity can correspond to a PLMN ID
  • the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same, which can be understood as the PLMN ID corresponding to the first user identity and the PLMN ID corresponding to the second user identity
  • the ID is the same.
  • the terminal device may send the third indication information to the core network device as the first user.
  • the terminal device may also send the third indication information to the core network device through other messages.
  • the terminal device may send the third indication information to the core network device as the second user.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the registration request. Or the terminal device may also send the third indication information to the core network device through other messages. The terminal device only needs to send the third indication information to the core network device with any user identity, and there is no need to send the third indication information to the core network device through two user identities, which can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device not only sends the third indication information to the core network device as the first user, but also sends the third indication information to the core network device as the second user.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the registration request.
  • the terminal device registers to the network as the second user, the third indication information may also be carried in the registration request.
  • the terminal device sends the first instruction information to the core network device through both user identities, which can play a role of verification.
  • the core network device can only receive the third instruction information sent by the terminal device through the two user identities.
  • the core network device Confirm that the indication of the third indication information is "true", in other words, it is determined that the third indication information is reliable, and if the core network device only receives the third indication information sent by the terminal device through a user identity, it does not receive it If the terminal device sends the instruction information through another user identity, the core network device considers the third instruction information to be unreliable, and may not schedule the terminal device according to the instructions of the first instruction information. In this way, the reliability of information transmission can be improved.
  • the method further includes:
  • whether two user identities belonging to the same operator always have the same serving cell can be configured by the core network device, or can also be specified by agreement, etc.
  • the core network device configuration is taken as an example .
  • the core network device may send fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information may indicate the first user identity and the second user identity The identity always has the same serving cell, and the terminal device receives the fourth indication information to determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell; or, if the core network device does not configure the first user identity And the second user identity always have the same serving cell, that is, the core network equipment does not limit the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity, and the serving cell of the first user identity and the serving cell of the second user identity can be The same or different. In this case, the core network device may not send the fourth indication information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device does not receive the fourth indication information from the core network device, and can determine the identity of the first user and the second user.
  • the serving cell of the user's identity is not limited. In this case, there is no restriction on the value of the fourth indication information.
  • the core network device determines that the serving cell of the first user identity and the serving cell of the second user identity are not restricted to be the same, the fourth indication information may not be sent to the terminal device, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • the core network device may send fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information may indicate the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the user identity always has the same serving cell
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information to determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell; or, if the core network device does not configure the first
  • the user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, that is, the core network equipment does not limit the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity, and the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity serve The cells may be the same or different.
  • the core network device may also send fourth indication information to the terminal device.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate that the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity are not restricted.
  • the terminal device can determine that the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity are not restricted.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate different contents through different values. The terminal device always receives the fourth indication information, and can determine whether the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell according to the fourth indication information, and the indication is relatively clear.
  • a second communication method which can be applied to a terminal device that supports a first user identity and a second user identity, and the method includes: entering from a first cell with the first user identity RRC connection state; receiving a first message from an access network device as the first user, the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration, the The first configuration includes a physical layer configuration and/or a measurement configuration; the first user identity transmits and receives data or performs measurement according to the first configuration, and the first configuration is the configuration used by the second user identity; wherein, In the RRC connected state in the first cell as the second user.
  • the method may be executed by a second communication device, and the second communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip system set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • different user identities can share the same set of configurations, so that the access network device only needs to configure one terminal device once, which reduces the configuration process of the access network device. Moreover, because different user identities can share the same set of configurations, the access network device only needs to send the first configuration to the terminal device once, and there is no need to send the first configuration separately to different user identities, which saves signaling overhead.
  • the method further includes:
  • a second message is sent to the access network device with the identity of the first user, the second message includes the identity of the second user, and is used to indicate the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user Belong to the same terminal device.
  • the second identifier is, for example, the C-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the second message includes the second identity, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same Terminal Equipment. Further, the access network device can also determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity can share the same set of configurations.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request shared use of the first 2.
  • the configuration used by the user identity is used by the user identity.
  • the access network device belongs to the same terminal device according to the first user identity and the second user identity, it can be determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the user identity and the second user identity can share the same set of configurations.
  • the access network device after the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, it can determine according to the first indication information that the first user identity and the second user identity can use the same configuration.
  • the first indication information is used for the first user identity to request the sharing of the first configuration or the sharing of the physical layer with the second user identity, where the shared physical layer can be understood as sharing the physical layer configuration.
  • the method further includes:
  • the access network device may modify the first configuration. For example, the access network device modifies the values of all parameters or the values of some parameters in the first configuration. Then the access network device needs to send the modification information to the terminal device so that the terminal device can modify the first configuration. For example, the access network device may send a third message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device may receive the third message from the access network device as the first user identity; or the access network device may send the third message to the second user identity. The terminal device sends a third message, and the terminal device receives the third message from the access network device as the second user.
  • the access network device only needs to send the third message to the terminal device once, and there is no need to send the third message to different user identities, which saves signaling overhead.
  • different user identities correspond to the same set of configurations.
  • the access network equipment only needs to be modified for one set of configuration (the first configuration). There is no need to modify the configurations corresponding to different user identities, which reduces the cost of access network equipment. Workload.
  • a third communication method includes: determining that a terminal device enters an RRC connection state as a first user identity, wherein the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity; The terminal device of the first user identity sends a first message, where the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration, and the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration and/or Measurement configuration.
  • the method may be executed by a third communication device, which may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the communication device to implement the method, such as a chip system.
  • the communication device is an access network device.
  • the communication device is a chip system set in an access network device and used to implement the function of the access network device, or is another component used to implement the function of the access network device.
  • the access network device knows in advance that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, and it is determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell. Then, after the access network device finds that the terminal device has entered the RRC connected state as the second user first, and then enters the RRC connected state as the first user, it can send a first message to the terminal device to indicate the identity of the first user Share the first configuration or share the physical layer with the second user identity, or indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share the same set of configurations.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second identifier is, for example, the C-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the second message includes the second identity, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same Terminal Equipment. Further, the access network device can also determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity can share the same set of configurations. For example, if the access network device receives the second message, this step may occur before the access network device sends the first message to the terminal device.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request shared use of the first 2.
  • the configuration used by the user identity is used by the first user identity.
  • the access network device belongs to the same terminal device according to the first user identity and the second user identity, it can be determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the user identity and the second user identity can share the same set of configurations.
  • the access network device after the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, it can determine according to the first indication information that the first user identity and the second user identity can use the same configuration.
  • the first indication information is used for the first user identity to request the sharing of the first configuration or the sharing of the physical layer with the second user identity, where the shared physical layer can be understood as sharing the physical layer configuration.
  • the method further includes:
  • the access network device may modify the first configuration. For example, the access network device modifies the values of all parameters or the values of some parameters in the first configuration. Then the access network device needs to send the modification information to the terminal device so that the terminal device can modify the first configuration. For example, the access network device may send a third message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device may receive the third message from the access network device as the first user identity; or the access network device may send the third message to the second user identity. The terminal device sends a third message, and the terminal device receives the third message from the access network device as the second user.
  • the access network device only needs to send the third message to the terminal device once, and there is no need to send the third message to different user identities, which saves signaling overhead.
  • different user identities correspond to the same set of configurations.
  • the access network equipment only needs to be modified for one set of configuration (the first configuration). There is no need to modify the configurations corresponding to different user identities, which reduces the cost of access network equipment. Workload.
  • the method further includes:
  • the access network device determines that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, or determines that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user, or determines that the terminal device changes as the first user
  • the serving cell has reached the second cell, and it is determined that the terminal device has changed the serving cell to the second cell as the second user identity (wherein, since the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, if you want to change the serving cell, , The two user identities may change the serving cell and change to the same cell. Therefore, the access network equipment only needs to determine that one of the user’s identities needs to change the serving cell, or the access network equipment may also change the serving cell.
  • the access network device may not operate, but if the second cell and the first cell both belong to the access network device, The first cell does not belong to the same access network device, then the access network device may send second indication information to the first access network device, and the second indication information may indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same One terminal device, and the first access network device is the access network device to which the second cell belongs.
  • the first access network device After the first access network device receives the second indication information from the access network device, it can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, and that is, the first user identity and the second user identity can be determined The identity always has the same serving cell. Then, if the first access network device also needs to send a corresponding configuration to the terminal device, the first access network device also only needs to send a set of configurations to the terminal device, and two user identities can share this set of configurations.
  • a fourth communication method comprising: receiving a first message from a terminal device with a first user identity, the first message carrying a second identifier, and the second identifier corresponds to the second user
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, and the terminal device is in the radio resource control RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and uses the first
  • the user identity is in the RRC connection state; the first user identity and the second user identity are determined to belong to the terminal device according to the second identity; the second identity is sent to the network device, and the second identity is used
  • the terminal device indicating the identity of the second user resides in a cell under the access network device.
  • the method may be executed by a fourth communication device, and the fourth communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the communication device is an access network device.
  • the communication device is a chip system set in an access network device and used to implement the function of the access network device, or is another component used to implement the function of the access network device.
  • the second access network device can determine the access network device corresponding to the second identification, so that it can be determined that the second user identity corresponding to the second identification is the cell that resides in the access network device. Then, if the second user identity corresponding to the second identifier needs to enter the RRC connection state, the network device only needs to send a third message to the access network device, and it does not need to send the third message to other access network devices. This can reduce the number of third messages.
  • the network device can more accurately know the access network device or the cell in which the user identity of the terminal device resides, thereby eliminating the need for multiple access network devices or multiple cells. Sending the third message helps to save the overhead of paging messages.
  • the method further includes:
  • the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located;
  • the paging message is sent only in the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located.
  • the third message carries the second identifier, and the second identifier is, for example, the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the first access network device has stored the association relationship between the I-RNTI of the first user identity and the I-RNTI of the second user identity. Then the first access network device can determine the first access network device by querying the association relationship.
  • a user identity and a second user identity belong to the same terminal device, so that the first access network device can determine that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is the current serving cell of the terminal device of the first user identity.
  • the current serving cell of the terminal device of the first user identity is the first cell
  • the first access network device may determine that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is also the first cell.
  • the access network device determines that the cell where the terminal device with the second user identity currently resides is the current serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity. Then, the access network device only needs to send a paging message in the serving cell. Yes, there is no need to send paging messages in other cells, which can reduce the number of paging messages and save transmission overhead.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second identifier is the I-RNTI of the second user identity
  • the access network device can find the context information of the terminal device of the second user identity according to the I-RNTI of the second user identity. Because the context information of the second user identity is found, the access network device does not need to send a paging message on the air interface, but can directly send an RRC message to the terminal device of the second user identity, thereby saving the overhead of the paging message.
  • the second user identity in the RRC inactive state does not need to monitor the air interface paging message, which also makes the terminal device more power-saving.
  • the method further includes:
  • the N2 message carries the AMF UE NGAP ID and RAN UE NGAP ID of the second user identity, so that the access network device can determine the context information of the second user identity according to the N2 message. Because the context information of the second user identity is found, the access network device does not need to send a paging message on the air interface, but can directly send an RRC message to the terminal device of the second user identity, thereby saving the overhead of the paging message. Moreover, the second user identity in the RRC inactive state does not need to monitor the air interface paging message, which also makes the terminal device more power-saving.
  • the network device is the serving core network device of the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the network device is an access network device that stores the context of the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the core network device can initiate paging to the terminal device of the second user identity, so the network device may be a core network device.
  • the access network device may initiate a paging to the terminal device of the second user identity, so the network device may be an access network device.
  • a fifth communication method which can be applied to a terminal device that supports a first user identity and a second user identity, and the method includes: using the first user identity to switch from the RRC idle state or The RRC inactive state enters the RRC connected state; a first message is sent to the access network device as the first user identity, the first message carries a second identity, and the second identity is the identity of the second user identity
  • the second identifier is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, wherein the terminal device is in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state as the second user identity
  • Receive an RRC message from the access network device as the first user the RRC message is used to indicate that the terminal device with the second user identity has paged arrival, or indicate the second user
  • the terminal device with the identity enters the RRC connected state; enters the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the method may be executed by a fifth communication device, and the fifth communication device may be a communication device or a communication device capable of supporting the communication device to implement the functions required by the method, such as a chip system.
  • the fifth communication device is a terminal device.
  • the terminal device is a terminal device, or a chip system set in the terminal device for realizing the function of the terminal device, or other component used for realizing the function of the terminal device.
  • the access network device or core network device can more accurately know the access network device or the cell in which the user identity of the terminal device resides, so that there is no need to access multiple access networks.
  • the network equipment or multiple cells send paging messages, which helps to save the overhead of paging messages.
  • the access network device can also know the cell where the user identity of the terminal device resides, so that only the paging message needs to be sent in the cell, which can further save the overhead of the paging message.
  • the access network device may not need to send a paging message, but directly send an RRC message to the corresponding user identity, which can save the overhead of the paging message to a greater extent.
  • the core network device may also directly send the RRC message to the corresponding user identity without sending a paging message, which can save the overhead of the paging message to a greater extent.
  • the second identity when the terminal device of the second user identity is in the RRC idle state, the second identity is the second user identity When the terminal device of the second user identity is in the RRC inactive state, the second identity is the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the second identity may be different accordingly.
  • the second identifier is just two examples of the second identifier.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the second identifier to be other identifiers, as long as it can characterize the identity of the second user.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the first communication device as described above.
  • the first communication device is configured to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device may include a module for executing the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect, for example, including a processing module.
  • it may also include a transceiver module.
  • the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device. In the following, it is taken as an example that the first communication device is a terminal device. Wherein, the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity,
  • the processing module is configured to camp in the first cell as the first user, and to camp in the first cell as the second user;
  • the processing module is also used to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell
  • the processing module is further configured to change the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, and change the serving cell to the second cell as the second user;
  • the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same.
  • the processing module is configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell in the following manner:
  • the terminal device is in the radio resource control RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, and the first user is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • the user identity is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • the cell reselection process is performed based on the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, wherein the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is based on the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and/or The second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is determined,
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the first user
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the second user.
  • the processing module is configured to determine to camp on the second cell through a cell selection process in the following manner:
  • Cell selection is performed with the identity of the first user and/or the identity of the second user, and the second cell is determined to be selected.
  • the processing module is configured to determine to camp on the second cell through a cell reselection process in the following manner:
  • the processing module is configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell in the following manner, including:
  • a first message from an access network device is received through the transceiver module.
  • the first message is used to instruct to change the serving cell to the second cell, wherein the terminal device.
  • the first user identity is in the RRC connected state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC connected state, the RRC idle state, or the RRC inactive state.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and the processing module further uses Stop performing cell reselection or cell selection as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity
  • the processing module is further configured to When entering the RRC connected state as the second user, establish a connection with the second cell as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the second user identity
  • the first message carries first indication information
  • the An indication information is used to instruct to change the serving cell of the first user identity and the second user identity to the second cell.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to:
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send third indication information to the core network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate to the first user The identity is the same as the home PLMN of the second user identity.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive fourth indication information from the core network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the The first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the second communication device as described above.
  • the second communication device is configured to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device may include a module for executing the second aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the second aspect, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device. In the following, it is taken as an example that the second communication device is a terminal device. Wherein, the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity,
  • the processing module is configured to enter the RRC connected state from the first cell as the first user;
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive a first message from an access network device with the identity of the first user, the first message being used to indicate that the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user share a first configuration ,
  • the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration and/or a measurement configuration;
  • the processing module is further configured to send and receive data or perform measurement according to the first configuration with the identity of the first user, the first configuration being the configuration used by the identity of the second user;
  • the identity of the second user is in the RRC connected state in the first cell.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a second message to the access network device as the first user, and the second message
  • the identifier including the second user identity is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request shared use of the first 2.
  • the configuration used by the user identity is used by the first user identity.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a third message from the access network device, where the third message is used to modify the first configuration
  • the processing module is further configured to modify the first configuration based on the third message, and use the first user identity and the second user identity to send and receive data or perform measurement according to the modified first configuration.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the third communication device as described above.
  • the third communication device is configured to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device may include a module for executing the third aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is an access network device. In the following, it is taken as an example that the third communication device is an access network device. among them,
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the terminal device enters the RRC connection state as the first user identity, where the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity;
  • the transceiver module is configured to send a first message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration, and the The first configuration includes physical layer configuration and/or measurement configuration.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, where the second message includes The identifier of the second user identity is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request shared use of the first 2.
  • the configuration used by the user identity is used by the first user identity.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send a third message to the terminal device of the first user identity or the second user identity, The third message is used to modify the first configuration.
  • the processing module is further configured to determine that the terminal device changes a serving cell to a second cell with the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send second indication information to the first access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, so The first access network device is an access network device to which the second cell belongs.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the fourth communication device as described above.
  • the fourth communication device is configured to execute the foregoing fourth aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect.
  • the fourth communication device may include a module for executing the fourth aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the fourth communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is an access network device. In the following, it is taken as an example that the fourth communication device is an access network device. among them,
  • the transceiver module is configured to receive a first message from a terminal device of a first user identity, the first message carries a second identity, and the second identity is an identity corresponding to the second user identity, and the terminal device Supporting the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and is in the RRC connected state as the first user identity;
  • the processing module is configured to determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the terminal device according to the second identity
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send the second identifier to a network device, where the second identifier is used to indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides in a cell under the access network device .
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a paging message from the network device, where the paging message includes the second identifier;
  • the processing module is further configured to determine, according to the second identifier, that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located;
  • the transceiver module is also configured to send the paging message only in the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive a paging message from the network device, where the paging message includes the second identifier;
  • the processing module is further configured to determine the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the second identifier;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the RRC message is used to instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state, or to indicate A paging message arrives at the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive an N2 message from the network device for the first user identity, where the N2 message is used to indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity enters the RRC connection state, or instructs all Paging arrives at the terminal device of the second user identity;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the RRC message is used to instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state, or to indicate The terminal device of the second user identity has paged arrival.
  • the network device is the serving core network device of the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the network device is an access network device that stores the context of the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • a communication device is provided, for example, the communication device is the fifth communication device as described above.
  • the fifth communication device is configured to execute the foregoing fifth aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect.
  • the fifth communication device may include a module for executing the method in the fifth aspect or any possible implementation manner of the fifth aspect, for example, including a processing module and a transceiver module.
  • the fifth communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device. In the following, it is taken as an example that the fifth communication device is a terminal device. Wherein, the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity,
  • the processing module is configured to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user;
  • the transceiver module is configured to send a first message to the access network device with the identity of the first user, the first message carrying a second identifier, and the second identifier is the identifier of the second user identity, and The second identifier is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, wherein the terminal device is in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state as the second user identity;
  • the transceiver module is further configured to receive an RRC message from the access network device as the first user, where the RRC message is used to indicate that the terminal device with the second user identity has a paging arrival; Or instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state;
  • the processing module is further configured to enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the second identity is the S-TMSI of the second user identity
  • the second identity is the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the first communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing first aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device may further include a memory.
  • the processor, the memory, and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing first aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the first communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the first communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the first communication device is a chip set in a communication device
  • the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected with a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component.
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity
  • the processor is configured to camp in the first cell as the first user, and camp in the first cell as the second user;
  • the processor is further configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell;
  • the processor is further configured to change the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, and change the serving cell to the second cell as the second user;
  • the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same.
  • the processor is configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell in the following manner:
  • the terminal device is in the radio resource control RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, and the first user is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • the user identity is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • the cell reselection process is performed based on the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, wherein the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is based on the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and/or The second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is determined,
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the first user
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the second user.
  • the processor is configured to determine to camp on the second cell through a cell selection process in the following manner:
  • Cell selection is performed with the identity of the first user and/or the identity of the second user, and the second cell is determined to be selected.
  • the processor is configured to determine to camp on the second cell through a cell reselection process in the following manner:
  • the processor is configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell in the following manner, including:
  • a first message from an access network device is received through the transceiver.
  • the first message is used to instruct to change a serving cell to the second cell, where the terminal device.
  • the first user identity is in the RRC connected state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC connected state, the RRC idle state, or the RRC inactive state.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and the processor, It is also used to stop cell reselection or cell selection as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity
  • the processor further It is used to establish a connection with the second cell as the second user when entering the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the second user, and the first message carries first indication information, so The first indication information is used to instruct to change the serving cell of the first user identity and the second user identity to the second cell.
  • the transceiver is further used for:
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the transceiver is further configured to send third indication information to a core network device, and the third indication information is used to indicate the second A user identity is the same as the home PLMN of the second user identity.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive fourth indication information from the core network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate The first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the second communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing second aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device may further include a memory.
  • the processor, the memory, and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing second aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the second communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the second communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the second communication device is a chip set in a communication device
  • the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected with a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component.
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity
  • the processor is configured to enter the RRC connected state from the first cell as the first user;
  • the transceiver is configured to receive a first message from an access network device as the first user, and the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration ,
  • the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration and/or a measurement configuration
  • the processor is further configured to send and receive data or perform measurement according to the first configuration as the first user identity, where the first configuration is the configuration used by the second user identity;
  • the identity of the second user is in the RRC connected state in the first cell.
  • the transceiver is further configured to send a second message to the access network device as the first user, and the first user
  • the second message includes the identifier of the second user identity, and is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request shared use Describe the configuration used by the second user identity.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive a third message from the access network device, where the third message is used to modify the first configuration
  • the processor is further configured to modify the first configuration based on the third message, and use the first user identity and the second user identity to send and receive data or perform measurement according to the modified first configuration.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the third communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the foregoing third aspect or various possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device may further include a memory.
  • the processor, the memory, and the transceiver are coupled with each other to implement the methods described in the foregoing third aspect or various possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the third communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is an access network device.
  • the third communication device is an access network device.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the third communication device is a chip set in a communication device, the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component. among them,
  • the processor is configured to determine that the terminal device enters the RRC connection state as the first user identity, wherein the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity;
  • the transceiver is configured to send a first message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration, and the The first configuration includes physical layer configuration and/or measurement configuration.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive a second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the second The message includes the identifier of the second user identity, which is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request shared use Describe the configuration used by the second user identity.
  • the transceiver is further configured to send a third user identity to the terminal device of the first user identity or the second user identity. Message, the third message is used to modify the first configuration.
  • the processor is further configured to determine that the terminal device changes a serving cell to a second cell with the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user;
  • the transceiver is further configured to send second indication information to the first access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, so
  • the first access network device is an access network device to which the second cell belongs.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the fourth communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing fourth aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect.
  • the third communication device may further include a memory.
  • the processor, the memory, and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the foregoing fourth aspect or the methods described in various possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect.
  • the fourth communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is an access network device.
  • the fourth communication device is an access network device.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the fourth communication device is a chip set in a communication device
  • the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component.
  • the transceiver is configured to receive a first message from a terminal device with a first user identity, the first message carries a second identifier, and the second identifier is an identifier corresponding to the second user identity, and the terminal device Supporting the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device is in the radio resource control RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and is in the RRC connected state as the first user identity;
  • the processor is configured to determine, according to the second identifier, that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the terminal device;
  • the transceiver is further configured to send the second identifier to a network device, where the second identifier is used to indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides in a cell under the access network device .
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive a paging message from the network device, where the paging message includes the second identifier;
  • the processor is further configured to determine, according to the second identifier, that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located;
  • the transceiver is also configured to send the paging message only in the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive a paging message from the network device, where the paging message includes the second identifier;
  • the processor is further configured to determine the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the second identifier;
  • the transceiver is further configured to send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the RRC message is used to instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state, or to instruct all A paging message arrives at the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive an N2 message from the network device for the first user identity, where the N2 message is used to indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity enters the RRC connection state, or instructs all Paging arrives at the terminal device of the second user identity;
  • the transceiver is further configured to send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the RRC message is used to instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state, or to instruct all The terminal device of the second user identity has paged arrival.
  • the network device is the serving core network device of the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the network device is an access network device that stores the context of the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device is, for example, the fifth communication device as described above.
  • the communication device includes a processor.
  • it may also include a transceiver.
  • the processor and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the foregoing fifth aspect or various possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect.
  • the third communication device may further include a memory.
  • the processor, the memory, and the transceiver are coupled with each other, and are used to implement the methods described in the foregoing fifth aspect or various possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect.
  • the fifth communication device is a communication device, or a chip or other component provided in the communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the fifth communication device is a terminal device.
  • the transceiver is realized by, for example, an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the fifth communication device is a chip set in a communication device
  • the transceiver is, for example, a communication interface in the chip, and the communication interface is connected with a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component.
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity
  • the processor is configured to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user;
  • the transceiver is configured to send a first message to the access network device with the identity of the first user, the first message carrying a second identity, and the second identity is the identity of the second user.
  • the second identifier is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, wherein the terminal device is in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state as the second user identity;
  • the transceiver is further configured to receive an RRC message from the access network device with the identity of the first user, where the RRC message is used to indicate that the terminal device with the identity of the second user has a paging arrival; Or instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state;
  • the processor is further configured to enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the second identity is the S-TMSI of the second user identity
  • the second identity is the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • a communication device may be the first communication device in the above method design.
  • the first communication device is a chip provided in a communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes: a communication interface for sending and receiving information, or in other words, for communicating with other devices; and a processor, where the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device may further include a memory for storing computer executable program code.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the communication device.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device is caused to execute the foregoing first aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the first aspect.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver in the first communication device, for example, implemented by an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin.
  • a communication device may be the second communication device in the above method design.
  • the second communication device is a chip provided in a communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes: a communication interface for sending and receiving information, or in other words, for communicating with other devices; and a processor, where the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device may further include a memory for storing computer executable program code.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the communication device.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device is caused to execute the foregoing second aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the second aspect.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver in the second communication device, for example, implemented by an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin.
  • a communication device is provided.
  • the communication device may be the third communication device in the above method design.
  • the third communication device is a chip provided in a communication device.
  • the communication device is an access network device.
  • the communication device includes: a communication interface for sending and receiving information, or in other words, for communicating with other devices; and a processor, where the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device may further include a memory for storing computer executable program code.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the communication device.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device is caused to execute the foregoing third aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the third aspect.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver in the third communication device, for example, implemented by an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as input/output pins.
  • a communication device may be the fourth communication device in the above method design.
  • the fourth communication device is a chip provided in a communication device.
  • the communication device is an access network device.
  • the communication device includes: a communication interface for sending and receiving information, or in other words, for communicating with other devices; and a processor, where the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device may further include a memory for storing computer executable program code.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the communication device.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device is caused to execute the foregoing fourth aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the fourth aspect.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver in the fourth communication device, for example, implemented by an antenna, a feeder, and a codec in the communication device.
  • the fourth communication device is a chip provided in a communication device, the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin.
  • a communication device may be the fifth communication device in the above method design.
  • the fifth communication device is a chip provided in a communication device.
  • the communication device is a terminal device.
  • the communication device includes: a communication interface for sending and receiving information, or in other words, for communicating with other devices; and a processor, where the processor is coupled with the communication interface.
  • the communication device may further include a memory for storing computer executable program code.
  • the communication device may not include a memory, and the memory may be located outside the communication device.
  • the program code stored in the memory includes instructions, and when the processor executes the instructions, the communication device is caused to execute the foregoing fifth aspect or the method in any one of the possible implementation manners of the fifth aspect.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver in the fifth communication device, for example, implemented by an antenna, a feeder, a codec, etc. in the communication device.
  • the fifth communication device is a chip provided in a communication device
  • the communication interface may be an input/output interface of the chip, such as an input/output pin.
  • a communication system which includes the communication device according to the sixth aspect, the communication device according to the eleventh aspect, or the communication device according to the sixteenth aspect.
  • a communication system which includes the communication device according to the seventh aspect, the communication device according to the twelfth aspect, or the communication device according to the seventeenth aspect, and includes the eighth aspect The communication device according to aspect, the communication device according to the thirteenth aspect, or the communication device according to the eighteenth aspect.
  • a communication system including the communication device according to the ninth aspect, the communication device according to the fourteenth aspect, or the communication device according to the nineteenth aspect, and including the tenth aspect
  • the communication system provided by the twenty-first aspect, the communication system provided by the twenty-second aspect, and the communication system provided by the twenty-third aspect may be the same communication system, or they may be different communication systems, or It is possible that any two of them are the same communication system, and the other is a different communication system.
  • a computer storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect.
  • a computer storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a computer storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect.
  • a computer storage medium the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect The method described in any one of the possible implementations.
  • a computer storage medium is provided, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store computer instructions, which when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, cause the computer to execute the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect above The method described in any one of the possible implementations.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes the first aspect or the first aspect described above.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or the second aspect described above.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions are executed on a computer, the computer executes the third aspect or the third aspect described above.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the fourth aspect or the fourth aspect.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, the computer program product is used to store computer instructions, and when the computer instructions run on a computer, the computer executes the fifth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device always have the same serving cell.
  • the two user identities do not need to perform operations such as measurement or judgment to determine the cell change.
  • the terminal device performs a corresponding measurement or judgment operation to determine the second cell, and then both user identities are changed to the second cell, or one of the user identity performs a corresponding measurement or judgment operation to determine the second cell.
  • the cell replacement process that needs to be performed is reduced, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • Figure 1 is a flowchart of a network device initiating a paging to a terminal device
  • Figure 2A is a schematic diagram of a terminal device in a passive mode
  • Figure 2B is a schematic diagram of a terminal device in DSDS mode
  • Figure 2C is a schematic diagram of a terminal device in DSDA mode
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of an application scenario of an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of another application scenario of an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of a communication method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a first terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is another schematic block diagram of the first terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a second type of terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 15 is another schematic block diagram of a second type of terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a first access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 17 is another schematic block diagram of the first access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a second type of access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 19 is another schematic block diagram of a second type of access network device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a third terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 21 is another schematic block diagram of a third terminal device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 23 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 24 is still another schematic block diagram of the communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 25 is another schematic block diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • Terminal devices including devices that provide users with voice and/or data connectivity, specifically, include devices that provide users with voice, or include devices that provide users with data connectivity, or include devices that provide users with voice and data connectivity Sexual equipment.
  • it may include a handheld device with a wireless connection function, or a processing device connected to a wireless modem.
  • the terminal device can communicate with the core network via a radio access network (RAN), exchange voice or data with the RAN, or exchange voice and data with the RAN.
  • RAN radio access network
  • the terminal equipment may include user equipment (UE), wireless terminal equipment, mobile terminal equipment, device-to-device communication (device-to-device, D2D) terminal equipment, vehicle to everything (V2X) terminal equipment , Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications (M2M/MTC) terminal equipment, Internet of things (IoT) terminal equipment, subscriber unit, subscriber station (subscriber) station), mobile station (mobile station), remote station (remote station), access point (access point, AP), remote terminal (remote terminal), access terminal (access terminal), user terminal (user terminal), user Agent (user agent), or user equipment (user device), etc.
  • UE user equipment
  • M2M/MTC Machine-to-machine/machine-type communications
  • IoT Internet of things
  • subscriber unit subscriber station (subscriber) station)
  • mobile station mobile station
  • remote station remote station
  • access point access point
  • AP remote terminal
  • remote terminal remote terminal
  • access terminal access terminal
  • user terminal user terminal
  • user Agent
  • it may include mobile phones (or “cellular” phones), computers with mobile terminal equipment, portable, pocket-sized, hand-held, mobile devices with built-in computers, and so on.
  • PCS personal communication service
  • PCS cordless phones
  • SIP session initiation protocol
  • WLL wireless local loop
  • PDA personal digital assistants
  • restricted devices such as devices with low power consumption, or devices with limited storage capabilities, or devices with limited computing capabilities. Examples include barcodes, radio frequency identification (RFID), sensors, global positioning system (GPS), laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • RFID radio frequency identification
  • GPS global positioning system
  • laser scanners and other information sensing equipment.
  • the terminal device may also be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices can also be called wearable smart devices or smart wearable devices, etc. It is a general term for using wearable technology to intelligently design daily wear and develop wearable devices, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing and shoes Wait.
  • a wearable device is a portable device that is directly worn on the body or integrated into the user's clothes or accessories. Wearable devices are not only a kind of hardware device, but also realize powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include full-featured, large-sized, complete or partial functions that can be achieved without relying on smart phones, such as smart watches or smart glasses, and only focus on a certain type of application function, and need to cooperate with other devices such as smart phones Use, such as all kinds of smart bracelets, smart helmets, smart jewelry, etc. for physical sign monitoring.
  • the various terminal devices described above if they are located on the vehicle (for example, placed in the vehicle or installed in the vehicle), can be regarded as vehicle-mounted terminal equipment, for example, the vehicle-mounted terminal equipment is also called on-board unit (OBU). ).
  • OBU on-board unit
  • the terminal device may also include a relay. Or it can be understood that everything that can communicate with the base station can be regarded as a terminal device.
  • the device for realizing the function of the terminal device may be a terminal device, or a device capable of supporting the terminal device to realize the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the terminal device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the terminal is a terminal device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • Network equipment including, for example, access network (AN) equipment, such as a base station (e.g., access point), which may refer to equipment that communicates with wireless terminal equipment through one or more cells on the air interface in the access network
  • AN access network
  • a base station e.g., access point
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • the base station can be used to convert the received air frame and IP packet to each other, as a router between the terminal device and the rest of the access network, where the rest of the access network can include the IP network.
  • the RSU can be a fixed infrastructure entity that supports V2X applications, and can exchange messages with other entities that support V2X applications.
  • the network equipment can also coordinate the attribute management of the air interface.
  • the network equipment may include a long term evolution (LTE) system or an evolved base station (NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional NodeB) in a long term evolution-advanced (LTE-A) system, Or it can also include the next generation node B (gNB) in the new radio (NR) system (also referred to as the NR system) in the 5th generation (5G) mobile communication technology (the 5th generation, 5G), or it can also Including a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU) in a cloud radio access network (cloud radio access network, Cloud RAN) system, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • LTE long term evolution
  • NodeB or eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional NodeB evolutional NodeB
  • LTE-A long term evolution-advanced
  • gNB next generation node B
  • NR new radio
  • 5G 5th generation
  • 5G 5th generation
  • CU centralized
  • the network equipment may also include core network equipment.
  • the core network equipment includes, for example, access and mobility management functions (AMF).
  • AMF access and mobility management functions
  • the device used to implement the function of the network device may be a network device, or a device capable of supporting the network device to implement the function, such as a chip system, and the device may be installed in the network device.
  • the device used to implement the functions of the network equipment is a network device as an example to describe the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • “user identity” (for example, the first user identity or the second user identity, etc.) is a logical concept.
  • “user identity” can correspond to SIM card or subscriber information or virtual SIM card or user identity (such as international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) or temporary mobile subscriber identity (TMSI), etc.) .
  • IMSI international mobile subscriber identity
  • TMSI temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • different "user identities” logically correspond to different communication entities served by the network side, such as UEs in 4G and 5G systems, such as a terminal device that supports two user identities. In other words, it can be regarded as two communicating entities.
  • the network side will recognize two terminal devices that support different SIM cards or different subscriber information as two different communication entities, and will also support multiple different communication entities.
  • the same terminal device with SIM card or multiple subscriber information is identified as multiple different communication entities, even in reality, the terminal device supporting multiple different SIM cards or multiple subscriber information is just one physical entity.
  • description will be made mainly by taking the "user identity" corresponding to the SIM card as an example.
  • the SIM card can be understood as the key for the terminal device to access the mobile network.
  • the SIM card and its evolution are collectively referred to as the SIM card in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the SIM card can be an identification card for a user of a global system for mobile communications (GSM) digital mobile phone, which is used to store the user's identification code and key, and supports the authentication of the user by the GSM system; and
  • the SIM card may also be a universal subscriber identity module (USIM), which may also be referred to as an upgraded SIM card.
  • GSM global system for mobile communications
  • USB universal subscriber identity module
  • Radio resource control (RRC) state terminal equipment has three RRC states: RRC connected state (connected state), RRC idle state (idle state) and inactive state (inactive state).
  • RRC connected state connected state
  • RRC idle state idle state
  • inactive state inactive state
  • RRC connected state (or, can also be referred to as connected state for short.
  • connected state and “RRC connected state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device establishes an RRC connection with the network, and it can Perform data transfer.
  • RRC idle state (or, it can also be referred to as idle state for short.
  • idle state and “RRC idle state” are the same concept, and the two terms can be interchanged): the terminal device does not establish an RRC connection with the network, The context of the terminal device is not stored. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state, it needs to initiate an RRC connection establishment process.
  • RRC inactive state (or, can also be referred to as inactive state for short.
  • inactive state “inactive state”, “deactivated state”, “inactive state”, “RRC inactive state” and “RRC deactivated state” , Is the same concept, these names can be interchanged):
  • the terminal device entered the RRC connection state before, and then the base station released the RRC connection, but the base station saved the context of the terminal device. If the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state again from the RRC inactive state, it needs to initiate the RRC connection recovery process (or called the RRC connection reestablishment process). Compared with the RRC establishment process, the RRC recovery process has shorter time delay and lower signaling overhead.
  • the base station needs to save the context of the terminal device, which will occupy the storage overhead of the base station.
  • the terminal device When the terminal device has no data transmission, in order to save power, the terminal device enters the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state. In this state, the terminal device needs to wake up at a certain position in a certain period to monitor whether the network is paging the terminal device.
  • Figure 1 is a flowchart of a network device initiating a paging to a terminal device.
  • the downlink data of the terminal equipment arrives at the core network equipment.
  • the core network device sends a paging message to the base station, and the base station receives the paging message from the core network device.
  • the core network For a terminal device in the RRC idle state, when downlink data arrives at the core network device (that is, the network wants to send data to the terminal device), the core network sends a paging message to multiple base stations in the terminal device registration area to trigger multiple The base station sends a paging message on the air interface.
  • Figure 1 only takes one of the base stations as an example.
  • the paging message may include the S-temporary mobile subscriber identity (S-TMSI) of the terminal device.
  • S-TMSI S-temporary mobile subscriber identity
  • the base station determines the paging occasion of the terminal device.
  • the base station can determine the paging occasion of the terminal device.
  • the base station sends a paging message through the air interface, and the terminal device receives the paging message from the base station.
  • the base station triggers the sending of the paging message.
  • the base station if the base station is configured with a radio access network-based notification area (RNA), the base station will send paging at the paging occasion of the terminal device in the cell indicated by the RNA. If there are cells belonging to other base stations in the cells indicated by RNA, the base station can send paging messages to other base stations, and other base stations can send paging messages through the air interface at the paging occasion of the terminal device.
  • RNA radio access network-based notification area
  • the paging message may carry the user equipment paging identity (UE paging identity), so that the terminal device receiving the paging message can identify whether the paging message is sent to itself.
  • UE paging identity user equipment paging identity
  • the terminal device can monitor the physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) at the paging occasion of the terminal device to receive the paging message. After receiving the paging message and determining that the terminal device is paged, the terminal device will initiate a new RRC connection establishment process on the cell where it currently resides, or initiate an RRC connection recovery process to enter the RRC connection state.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • At least one means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of the associated objects, indicating that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the associated objects before and after are in an “or” relationship.
  • "The following at least one item (a)” or similar expressions refers to any combination of these items, including any combination of a single item (a) or a plurality of items (a).
  • at least one item (a) of a, b, or c can mean: a, b, c, ab, ac, bc, or abc, where a, b, and c can be single or multiple .
  • first and second are used to distinguish multiple objects, and are not used to limit the size, order, timing, and priority of multiple objects. Level or importance, etc.
  • first channel bandwidth and the second channel bandwidth are only for distinguishing different channel bandwidths, but do not indicate the difference in size, priority, or importance of the two channel bandwidths.
  • the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as: an LTE system, an LTE-A system, an NR system, or a possible future communication system, which is not specifically limited.
  • the terminal device with dual SIM cards can have one of the following three modes:
  • Passive mode or also known as DSSS mode: Although two SIM cards can be inserted, only one can be used at a time.
  • FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram of the passive mode.
  • two SIM cards are respectively USIM1 and USIM2 as an example.
  • USIM1 works (or in RRC connected state (connected)), that is, USIM1 can send and receive data, but USIM2 cannot be used at this time; or, at time 2, USIM2 works (or in RRC connected state), also That is, USIM2 can send and receive data, but USIM1 cannot be used at this time.
  • DSDS mode Two SIM cards share a set of transceivers. For the idle state, the transceiver needs to monitor the paging messages of the two cards. For example, the transceiver may use time division multiple (TDM) mode to monitor.
  • TDM time division multiple
  • FIG. 2B is a schematic diagram of the DSDS mode.
  • two SIM cards are USIM1 and USIM2 respectively as an example.
  • USIM1 is working (or in RRC connected state), that is, USIM1 can send and receive data
  • USIM2 can be in RRC idle state or RRC inactive state (inactive); or, USIM2 is working (or in RRC connected state) ), that is, USIM2 can send and receive data.
  • USIM1 can be in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • DSDA mode Two SIM cards use their own transceivers. The two SIM cards can be in the RRC connection state at the same time, that is, the terminal device can receive and send data from the two SIM cards at the same time.
  • FIG. 2C is a schematic diagram of the DSDA mode.
  • two SIM cards are USIM1 and USIM2 respectively as an example.
  • USIM1 When USIM1 is working (or when it enters the RRC connected state), that is, when USIM1 is sending and receiving data, USIM2 can also work, that is, USIM2 and USIM1 can be in the RRC connected state at the same time.
  • the terminal device When an idle or RRC inactive terminal device resides in a cell, as the terminal device moves, the terminal device may need to be changed to another cell with a higher priority or better signal to camp on. This is the cell Re-election process.
  • the serving cell of the terminal device may be unavailable or unsuitable for continuing to reside, then the terminal device needs to be changed to A suitable cell is camped on, or a terminal device has just been turned on, and a suitable cell needs to be found to camp on. This is the cell selection process.
  • Cell selection is a process of finding a suitable cell as soon as possible, and cell reselection is a process of selecting a more suitable cell.
  • the terminal device uses the dedicated cell reselection priority configuration for cell reselection, otherwise the terminal device uses the cell reselection priority configuration broadcast by the cell.
  • the cell reselection priority configuration refers to the configuration of priority for some frequencies.
  • the terminal device performs cell reselection, it needs to measure the corresponding frequency to select a suitable cell.
  • the terminal device can preferentially select a higher priority.
  • the high frequency corresponds to the cell.
  • the terminal equipment measures frequency 1 and frequency 2. In frequency 1, cell 1 meets the cell reselection conditions, and cell 2 meets the cell reselection conditions under frequency 2, but the priority of frequency 1 is lower than the priority of frequency 2. ,
  • the terminal equipment reselects to cell 2.
  • the two SIM cards may belong to the same operator. However, the two SIM cards still need to perform cell selection or reselection processes independently, which consumes a lot of power for terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • both user identities can be changed.
  • Serve the cell and continue to change to the same cell then the identities of the two users do not have to perform measurement or judgment for determining cell change (for example, cell reselection, cell selection, or cell handover, etc.), but the terminal device performs a corresponding response
  • the process of cell replacement that needs to be performed is reduced, thereby reducing the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • FIG. 3A is an application scenario of an embodiment of this application.
  • Figure 3A includes an access network device, a core network device, and a terminal device.
  • the access network equipment for example, works in an evolved universal mobile communication system terrestrial radio access (evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access, E-UTRA) system, or works in an NR system, or works in a next-generation communication system or other In the communication system.
  • the core network equipment for example, works in the E-UTRA system, or works in the NR system, or works in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the core network equipment works in the 5G core network (5GC) as example.
  • 5GC 5G core network
  • one access network device can serve multiple terminal devices.
  • FIG. 3A only takes one terminal device as an example.
  • a core network device can also serve multiple access network devices.
  • 3A only takes one of the access network equipment as an example.
  • FIG. 3B is another application scenario of the embodiment of this application.
  • 3B includes an access network device 1, an access network device 2, a core network device 1, a core network device 2, and a terminal device.
  • Figure 3B takes the access network as the next generation (NG) NG-radio access network (RAN) as an example.
  • the core network equipment and the access network equipment can communicate through the NG interface, and the access network
  • the device and the access network device can communicate through the Xn interface.
  • the Uu interface can be used to communicate between the access network device and the terminal device.
  • these two access network devices for example, work in the evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) system, or work in the NR system, or work in the next-generation communication system Or in other communication systems.
  • These two core network devices for example, work in the E-UTRA system, or in the NR system, or in the next-generation communication system or other communication systems.
  • the access network device in FIG. 3A or FIG. 3B is, for example, a base station.
  • the access network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • a 4G system it can correspond to an eNB
  • a 5G system it corresponds to an access network device in 5G, such as gNB.
  • core network equipment corresponds to different equipment in different systems.
  • MME mobility management entity
  • a 5G system it corresponds to a core network equipment in 5G, such as AMF.
  • the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of this application can also be applied to future mobile communication systems. Therefore, the access network equipment in FIG. 3A or FIG.
  • the access network device is a base station as an example.
  • the access network device may also be a device such as an RSU.
  • the terminal device that can install one SIM card is considered to be that the terminal device supports one user identity.
  • a terminal device that can install two SIM cards can support two user identities, which can be understood as: There is a one-to-one correspondence between the SIM card and the user identity.
  • This article mainly takes the terminal device supporting two user identities as an example, and the two user identities are called the first user identity and the second user identity respectively.
  • the first user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 1 is installed
  • the second user identity can be understood as the user identity that the terminal device has after the SIM card 2 is installed.
  • the terminal device can also support more than two user identities.
  • the terminal device can support three user identities and four user identities. Or more user identities, and can be registered in more than two networks, and each user identity can be registered in one network.
  • the embodiments of this application will mainly be described based on the terminal device supporting two user identities.
  • the specific implementation can refer to the related description of the terminal device supporting two user identities, and some simple things may be required. However, it is also within the protection scope of the embodiments of this application.
  • the terminal device when the user identity of the terminal device is the first user identity, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as a user (from the perspective of the protocol, it is a terminal device, for example, called the first user );
  • the terminal device when the user identity of the terminal device is the second user identity, from the perspective of the network side, the terminal device can be understood as another user (for example, referred to as the second user).
  • the terminal device can be registered in the first network as the first user and registered in the second network as the second user.
  • the terminal device supports one user identity, which can also be described as the terminal device having one user identity.
  • the terminal device supports two user identities, which can also be described as the terminal device having two user identities.
  • the terminal device with the first user identity can be understood as “the first user identity of the terminal device", as indicated by these two descriptions.
  • the content is the same, and the two descriptions can be interchanged.
  • the terminal device of the second user identity can be understood as “the second user identity of the terminal device”.
  • the content indicated by the two description methods is the same, and the two description methods can be interchanged.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. Please refer to FIG. 4, which is a flowchart of the method. In the following introduction process, the application of this method to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A or FIG. 3B is taken as an example.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 can be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation.
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system. The same is true for the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • the core network equipment described below may be
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the core network device described below may be the core network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal device described below may be It is a terminal device in the network architecture shown in Figure 3B.
  • the terminal device camps in the first cell as the first user, and camps in the first cell as the second user.
  • the "camping in the first cell” mentioned here also includes the RRC connected state. For example, if the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the first user identity, the terminal device resides in the first cell as the first user identity, which means that the first cell is the serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, and is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user. Then, the terminal device camps in the first cell as the first user, and camps in the first cell as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the first user, and is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user. Then, the terminal device accesses the first cell as the first user (the first cell is the serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity), and camps on the first cell as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the first user, and is in the RRC connected state as the second user. Then, the terminal device is connected to the first cell as the first user (the first cell is the serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity), and is connected to the first cell as the second user (the first cell). The cell is the serving cell of the terminal device of the second user identity).
  • the terminal device sends third indication information to the core network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the home (public land mobile network, PLMN) of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same.
  • the core network device receives the third indication information from the terminal device, and can determine that the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same.
  • each user identity can correspond to a PLMN identity number (ID), and the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same, which can be understood as the PLMN ID corresponding to the first user identity and the second user identity
  • ID the ID of the corresponding PLMN is the same.
  • the terminal device supports at least two user identities, and the at least two user identities include a first user identity and a second user identity.
  • the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same, it can be understood that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same operator.
  • the terminal device may send the third indication information to the core network device as the first user.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the registration request.
  • the terminal device may also send the third indication information to the core network device through other messages.
  • the third indication information may include the ID of the second user identity, for example, the S-TMSI of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device may send the third instruction information to the core network device as the second user.
  • the third instruction information may be carried in the registration request.
  • the terminal device may also send the third indication information to the core network device through other messages.
  • the third indication information includes the ID of the first user identity, for example, the S-TMSI of the first user identity.
  • the terminal device only needs to send the third indication information to the core network device with any user identity, and there is no need to send the third indication information to the core network device through two user identities, which can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device not only sends the third indication information to the core network device as the first user, but also sends the third indication information to the core network device as the second user.
  • the third indication information may be carried in the registration request.
  • the terminal device registers to the network as the second user, the third indication information may also be carried in the registration request.
  • the terminal device sends the first instruction information to the core network device through both user identities, which can play a role of verification.
  • the core network device can only receive the third instruction information sent by the terminal device through the two user identities.
  • the core network device Confirm that the indication of the third indication information is "true", and if the core network device only receives the third indication information sent by the terminal equipment through one user identity, but does not receive the indication information sent by the terminal equipment through another user identity , The core network device considers the third indication information to be unreliable, and may not schedule the terminal device according to the indication of the first indication information.
  • S402 may occur before S401, or S402 may occur after S401, or S401 and S402 may occur simultaneously.
  • the core network device sends fourth indication information to the terminal device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information from the core network device, the terminal device ensures that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • whether two user identities belonging to the same operator always have the same serving cell can be configured by the core network device, or can also be specified by agreement, etc.
  • the core network device configuration is taken as an example .
  • the core network device may send fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information may indicate the first user identity and the second user identity
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information, and the terminal device ensures that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell; or, if the core network device does not configure the first user identity And the second user identity always have the same serving cell, that is, the core network equipment does not limit the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity, and the serving cell of the first user identity and the serving cell of the second user identity can be The same or different.
  • the core network device may not send the fourth indication information to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device does not receive the fourth indication information from the core network device, and can determine the identity of the first user and the second user.
  • the serving cell of the user's identity is not limited. In this case, there is no restriction on the value of the fourth indication information.
  • the core network device determines that the serving cell of the first user identity and the serving cell of the second user identity are not restricted to be the same, the fourth indication information may not be sent to the terminal device, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • the core network device may send fourth indication information to the terminal device, and the fourth indication information may indicate the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the user identity always has the same serving cell
  • the terminal device receives the fourth indication information to determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell; or, if the core network device does not configure the first
  • the user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, that is, the core network equipment does not limit the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity, and the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity serve The cells may be the same or different.
  • the core network device may also send fourth indication information to the terminal device.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate that the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity are not restricted.
  • the terminal device can determine that the serving cells of the first user identity and the second user identity are not restricted.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate different contents through different values. The terminal device always receives the fourth indication information, and can determine whether the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell according to the fourth indication information, and the indication is relatively clear.
  • one user identity can correspond to multiple cells, for example, the first user identity can be connected to multiple cells, and/or the second user identity can be connected to multiple cells, then the first user identity It always has the same serving cell as the second user identity. It can be understood that the primary cell of the first user identity and the primary cell of the second user identity are the same, and the secondary cell of the first user identity and the secondary cell of the second user identity can be The same or different.
  • S402 and S403 are only optional steps, and the terminal device may also determine that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell in other ways.
  • S404 Determine to change the serving cell to the second cell.
  • the determination to change to the second cell may include determining to reselect (or camp) to the second cell through the cell reselection process, or determine to select (or camp) to the second cell through the cell selection process, or through The cell handover process determines the handover to the second cell.
  • the terminal device may determine to change to the second cell as the first user, or determine to change to the second cell as the second user, which is equivalent to that the terminal device only performs the replacement process once.
  • the replacement process involves measurement. If the terminal device only performs one replacement process, then the terminal device can only perform one measurement process (or one round of measurement process), There is no need to perform the measurement process separately with each user identity, which reduces the measurement process of the terminal equipment and saves the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, and changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user.
  • the two user identities both change the serving cell and continue to change to the same cell, so that it can be guaranteed that the two user identities always have the same serving cell.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of another embodiment provided in this application.
  • This embodiment provides a communication method.
  • the communication method introduces that the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device always have In the case of the same serving cell, how the terminal device performs cell reselection or cell selection is equivalent to that in this embodiment, the change of cells may refer to cell reselection or cell selection.
  • both the first user identity and the second user identity are in the RRC idle state or both are in the RRC inactive state, or the first user identity is in the RRC idle state and the second user identity is in the RRC inactive state, or The second user identity is in the RRC idle state, and the first user identity is in the RRC inactive state.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 may be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system. The same is true for the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a terminal device.
  • the access network device described below may be For the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A, the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A. Or, if this embodiment is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, the access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal described below The device may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the access network device sends first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information (dedicated cell reselection priority) to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure the first user Priority information for the identity during cell reselection.
  • the terminal device receives the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information from the access network device as the first user, and the terminal device can determine when performing cell reselection as the first user based on the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information Priority information at the time.
  • the terminal device camps in the first cell as the first user and camps in the first cell as the second user.
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information may be used to configure the priority of the frequency measured in the process of cell reselection as the first user, or to configure the priority of the cell reselection process as the first user.
  • the priority of the measured cell or used to configure the priority of the frequency measured in the process of cell reselection as the first user, and configure the cell measured in the process of cell reselection as the first user Priority.
  • the terminal device may measure one or more frequencies to select a suitable cell.
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can configure the priority of all or part of the frequency measured by the terminal device as the first user, so that the terminal device can decide which frequency cells to measure, and based on the measurement result and frequency.
  • the priority is to select the cell. For example, the terminal device measures frequency 1 and frequency 2. In frequency 1, cell 1 meets the cell reselection condition, and under frequency 2, cell 2 meets the cell reselection condition. However, if the priority of frequency 1 is lower than the priority of frequency 2, the terminal device can determine the identity of the first user to reselect to cell 2.
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information may be included in the RRC connection release (RRC connection release) message sent to the terminal device of the first user identity, or may also be included in other messages sent to the first user identity.
  • RRC connection release RRC connection release
  • Terminal Equipment Terminal Equipment
  • the access network device sends second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, where the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure when cell reselection is performed as the second user. Priority information.
  • the terminal device receives the second private cell reselection priority configuration information from the access network device as the second user, and the terminal device can determine when performing cell reselection as the second user according to the second private cell reselection priority configuration information Priority information at the time.
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be used to configure the priority of the frequency measured in the process of cell reselection as the second user, or to configure the process of cell reselection as the second user.
  • the terminal device may measure one or more frequencies to select a suitable cell.
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can configure the priority of all or part of the frequency measured by the terminal device as the second user, so that the terminal device can decide which frequency cells to measure, and based on the measurement result and frequency.
  • the priority is to select the cell. For example, the terminal device measures frequency 1 and frequency 2. In frequency 1, cell 1 meets the cell reselection condition, and under frequency 2, cell 2 meets the cell reselection condition. However, if the priority of frequency 1 is lower than the priority of frequency 2, the terminal device can determine the identity of the second user to reselect to cell 2.
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information may be included in the RRC connection release message sent to the terminal device of the second user identity, or may also be included in other messages sent to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • S501 may be executed before S502, or S501 may be executed after S502, or S501 and S502 may be executed at the same time.
  • the terminal device determines that the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is the configuration information used in the cell reselection process.
  • the terminal device may obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, or obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, Or obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is obtained according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, for example, the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be directly used as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information ; Alternatively, part of the information in the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be selected as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information; or, part of the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can also be added Information, the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information after the information is added is used as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be directly used as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information; or , Part of the information in the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can also be selected as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information; or, part of the information can also be added to the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information,
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information after the information is added is used as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be obtained.
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be combined with the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is combined, and the whole is used as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information; alternatively, the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information or the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be used as the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • Three private cell reselection priority configuration information alternatively, part of the information in the first private cell reselection priority configuration information and the second private cell reselection priority configuration information can be used as the third private cell reselection priority configuration information ; Or, you can also add part of the information in the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, and add the information to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the second private cell reselection priority configuration information is used as the third private cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the access network device may only send one set of configuration information to the terminal device, then the terminal device will only receive one set of configuration information.
  • the access network device only sends the first private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the first user identity, but does not send the second private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, then the terminal If the device only receives the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the first user, and does not receive the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the second user, the terminal device can reselect the first dedicated cell
  • the priority configuration information obtains the third private cell reselection priority configuration information; or, the access network device only sends the second private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, but not the first user identity If the terminal device sends the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, the terminal device will only receive the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the second user, and will not receive the first set
  • the terminal device can receive the two sets of configuration information. For example, if the access network device sends the first private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the first user identity, and sends the second private cell reselection priority configuration information to the terminal device of the second user identity, the terminal device The first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be received as the first user, and the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information can be received as the second user.
  • the terminal device can obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, or obtain the third dedicated cell reselection priority according to the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information Configuration information, or, obtaining the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information according to the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the terminal device may randomly select the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information or the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information; or, the SIM corresponding to the first user identity If one of the SIM cards corresponding to the card and the second user identity is the primary card and the other is the secondary card, the terminal device can select the private cell reselection priority configuration information corresponding to the primary card as the third private cell reselection priority configuration Information, or select the dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information corresponding to the secondary card as the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information.
  • the terminal device may determine the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information as the configuration information used in the cell reselection process with the identity of the first user; or determine the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information with the identity of the second user Is the configuration information used in the cell reselection process; or, the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is determined as the configuration information used in the cell reselection process with the identity of the first user, and the third dedicated cell is determined with the identity of the second user
  • the cell reselection priority configuration information is the configuration information used in the cell reselection process.
  • S502 and S503 may not need to be performed.
  • the terminal device determines to camp on the second cell through a cell reselection process or a cell selection process.
  • S504 can be regarded as an implementation of S404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device determines to change the serving cell to the second cell through the cell reselection process or the cell selection process.
  • the replacement here may refer to cell reselection or cell selection.
  • the second cell may be a cell under the access network device, or may also be a cell under another access network device.
  • a cell is a cell under an access network device. It can be understood that the cell is an area covered by the access network device, or in other words, the cell is a cell served by the access network device. .
  • the second cell is a cell under the access network device, and it can be understood that the second cell is an area covered by the access network device, or in other words, the second cell is a cell served by the access network device.
  • the terminal device may perform the cell reselection process according to the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information. For example, the terminal device may not perform cell reselection as any user and determine to reselect to the first cell, that is, the terminal device may directly perform cell reselection and determine to reselect to the second cell; or, The terminal device may also perform cell reselection as the first user and determine to reselect to the second cell; or, the terminal device may also perform cell reselection as the second user and determine to reselect to the second cell.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell reselection process only once, and there is no need to perform the cell reselection process separately with different user identities, which reduces the cell reselection process that needs to be performed, and helps reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can also perform cell selection.
  • the terminal device may not perform cell selection with any user identity and determine to select the second cell, that is, the terminal device may directly perform cell selection and determine to select the second cell.
  • the terminal device may also perform cell selection as the first user and determine to select the second cell, or the terminal device may also perform cell selection as the second user and determine to select the second cell.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell selection process only once, and there is no need to perform the cell selection process separately with different user identities, which reduces the cell selection process that needs to be performed, and helps reduce the power consumption of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, and changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user.
  • S505 can be regarded as an implementation of S405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device camps in the second cell as the first user, and also camps in the first cell as the second user, so that it can be satisfied that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same identity.
  • Serving cell here should be considered as the cell where you are staying.
  • the terminal device can perform the cell reselection process (or cell selection process) only once, and does not need to perform the cell reselection process (or cell selection process) separately with different user identities, which reduces the need to perform the cell reselection process (or cell selection process). Selection process), which helps to reduce the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the first user identity is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another embodiment provided in this application.
  • This embodiment provides a communication method.
  • the communication method introduces that the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device always have In the case of the same serving cell, if one user identity needs to perform cell handover, what should be done with the other user identity.
  • the first user identity is in the RRC connected state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state
  • the first user identity is in the RRC idle state or RRC is inactive
  • the first user identity is in the RRC connected state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as an example.
  • the change of the cell with the first user identity may refer to cell handover
  • the change of the cell with the second user identity may refer to cell reselection or cell selection.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 can be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, an example is taken that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a terminal device.
  • the access network device described below may be
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A.
  • the access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal described below The device may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the access network device sends a first message to the terminal device, where the first message is used to instruct to change the serving cell to the second cell.
  • the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device, and determines to change the serving cell to the second cell according to the first message.
  • the terminal device determines to change the serving cell to the second cell according to the first message, which can be regarded as an implementation manner of S404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the first message is, for example, a handover command. Because the terminal device is in the RRC connected state as the first user, and in the RRC idle state or RRC inactive state as the second user, the access network device can send the first message to the terminal device with the first user identity, and The terminal device can receive the first message from the access network device as the first user.
  • Figure 6 is the terminal device that can send the first message to the first user as the access network device. The terminal device receives the first message as the first user. Take the first message from the access network device as an example.
  • the first message may indicate to change the cell to the second cell as the first user.
  • the changing of the cell to the second cell as the first user mentioned here may refer to the handover to the second cell as the first user.
  • the terminal device can also perform a corresponding measurement process, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the terminal device for example, camps in the first cell of the access network device as the first user, and camps in the first cell as the first user.
  • the access network device may be the source access network device of the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the first cell may be the source cell of the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the second cell may be the source cell of the terminal device of the first user identity. Target cell.
  • S602 The terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user.
  • the terminal device performs cell handover with the identity of the first user, for example, the handover cell (target cell) is the second cell. That is, the terminal device switches to the second cell as the first user.
  • the handover cell target cell
  • the terminal device does not perform cell reselection or cell selection as the second user. For example, if the terminal device performs cell reselection or cell selection as the second user before entering the RRC connected state as the first user, then when entering the RRC connected state as the first user, the terminal device stops using the second user.
  • the user identity performs cell reselection or cell selection, which also means that when the terminal device enters the RRC connection state as the first user, the terminal device does not perform cell reselection or cell selection as the second user, for example, it stops performing cell reselection or cell selection as the second user. 2. Perform measurement with the user identity to stop performing cell reselection or cell selection as the second user; or the terminal device stops performing cell reselection or cell selection as the second user.
  • the terminal device performs cell handover as the first user, and what it performs may be a normal cell handover procedure, which will not be repeated here.
  • the source cell and the target cell (that is, the second cell) of the first user identity of the terminal device do not belong to the same access network device as an example, which is equivalent to that the terminal device accesses the network device from the source as the first user. Switch to the target access network device.
  • the source access network device here may be the access network device described in S601.
  • S603 The terminal device camps on the second cell as the second user.
  • S602 and S603 can be regarded as an implementation of S405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device switches to the second cell with the identity of the first user, and the second cell is the serving cell of the terminal device with the identity of the first user. Then, in order to satisfy the condition that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, the terminal device can camp on the second cell as the second user identity, so that the two user identities are always in the same cell . Moreover, the terminal device does not need to perform cell reselection or cell selection with the identity of the second user, and only needs to camp the second user identity in the second cell according to the cell handover result of the first user identity, which reduces the cell reselection process or cell selection. The selection process reduces the power consumption of the terminal equipment.
  • the second user identity in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state needs to enter the RRC connected state (for example, if the downlink data of the second user identity arrives on the network side, the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connected state), because the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connected state.
  • the cell where the user identity resides and the serving cell of the first user identity in the RRC connected state are the same cell, that is, the second cell. Therefore, the terminal device enters the serving cell in the RRC connected state from the camping cell as the second user.
  • the serving cell of the first user identity in the RRC connected state is the same serving cell, that is, the terminal device can directly access the second cell where it resides as the second user identity, so that the two user identities of the terminal device are always They have the same serving cell.
  • the second cell may be a cell under the aforementioned access network device, or may also be a cell under another access network device.
  • FIG. 6 takes as an example that the second cell is a cell under the access network device.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another embodiment provided for this application.
  • This embodiment provides a communication method.
  • the communication method introduces that the first user identity and the second user identity of the terminal device always have In the case of the same serving cell, how does the terminal device perform cell handover? In this embodiment, for example, both the first user identity and the second user identity are in the RRC connected state.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 can be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device, where the first communication device can be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system. The same is true for the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • the access network device described below may be For the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A, the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A. Or, if this embodiment is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, the access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal described below The device may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the access network device sends a first message to the terminal device, where the first message is used to instruct to change the serving cell to the second cell.
  • the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device, and determines to change the serving cell to the second cell according to the first message.
  • the terminal device determines to change the serving cell to the second cell according to the first message, which can be regarded as an implementation manner of S404 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device before changing the cell, the terminal device camps in the first cell as the first user, and camps in the first cell as the second user.
  • the terminal device is in the RRC connected state in the first cell as the first user, and is in the RRC connected state in the first cell as the second user.
  • the access network device may be the source access network device of the terminal device of the first user identity and the terminal device of the second user identity
  • the first cell may be the terminal device of the first user identity and the terminal device of the second user identity
  • the source cell and the second cell may be the target cell of the terminal device of the first user identity and the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the first message is, for example, a handover command.
  • the access network device can send the first message to the terminal device with the first user identity, and the terminal device can be in the first user identity.
  • a user identity receives the first message from the access network device; or, the access network device can send the first message to the terminal device of the second user identity, and the terminal device can receive the first message from the access network device as the second user.
  • the access network device can also send the first message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and also send the first message to the terminal device of the second user identity, and the terminal device can be the first user
  • the identity receives the first message from the access network device
  • the second user identity receives the first message from the access network device.
  • the first message may also carry first indication information, and the first indication information indicates that the first user identity and the second user identity are to be changed from a cell to a second cell.
  • the terminal device can more clearly know how to change the cell for the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the first indication information only indicates to change the cell to the second cell, but does not specifically indicate whether the first user identity changes the cell or the second user identity changes the cell. Because the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, the terminal device can clearly change both the first user identity and the second user identity to the second cell according to the first indication information.
  • the terminal device can also perform a corresponding measurement process, etc., which is not limited here.
  • the terminal device may send the second indication information to the access network device.
  • the second indication information includes a first identification or a second identification, the first identification is the identification of the first user identity, the second identification is the identification of the second user identity, and the second indication information is used to indicate the first user identity and the second user identity
  • the identity belongs to the same terminal device.
  • the terminal device sends the second instruction information to the access network device as the first user, and the second instruction information may include the second identifier, or the terminal device sends the second instruction information to the access network device as the second user.
  • the second indication information may include the first identifier.
  • the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, so that it can also be determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • both the first identifier and the second identifier may be a cell radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI).
  • C-RNTI cell radio network temporary identifier
  • the first identifier is the C-RNTI of the first user identity, such as C-RNTI 1
  • the second identifier is the C-RNTI of the second user identity, such as C-RNTI 2.
  • the C-RNTI can only be obtained by the terminal device after the user identity enters the RRC connected state. Therefore, the terminal device can use the latter user identity that enters the RRC connected state to send the second indication information to the network device.
  • the terminal device can obtain C-RNTI 1 after the first user identity enters the RRC connected state, and enters the RRC connection state under the second user identity After the state, the C-RNTI 2 can be obtained, and the terminal device can send the second indication information to the network device as the second user.
  • the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user according to the first message, and changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user.
  • S702 can be regarded as an implementation of S405 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4.
  • the terminal device can change the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, and change the serving cell to the second cell as the second user. Because the terminal device is in the RRC connection state in the first cell as the first user, the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user. It may be that the terminal device switches to the second cell as the first user. In the same way, the terminal device is in the RRC connection state in the first cell as the second user. Therefore, the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user. It may be that the terminal device switches to the second cell as the second user. Second cell.
  • the terminal device can first hand over to the first cell as the first user, and then hand over to the first cell as the second user; or, the terminal device can first hand over to the first cell as the second user, and then switch to the first cell as the first user.
  • the user identity is handed over to the first cell; or, the terminal device can be handed over to the first cell as the first user and to the first cell as the second user at the same time.
  • the access network device since the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, the access network device only needs to send a handover command once, and the terminal device can compare the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the identities are all switched to the first cell, and there is no need for network equipment to send handover commands to different user identities, which helps to save signaling overhead.
  • the terminal device needs to detect paging messages in their respective serving cells with the first user identity and the second user identity. If the terminal equipment detects paging messages at the same time in two serving cells, but the terminal equipment has only one set of transceivers, then the terminal equipment can only detect paging messages in one of the serving cells, which will miss the detection. Paging message of another serving cell. However, in the embodiment shown in any one of the above figures 4-7, since the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, the first user identity and the second user identity Paging messages can be detected in the same cell.
  • the terminal device Even if the terminal device detects the paging message as the first user at the same time as the second user, the terminal device can also detect the paging message at the same time. , Solve the problem of paging conflict and reduce the missed detection of paging messages.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. Please refer to FIG. 8, which is a flowchart of the communication method.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 can be applied in combination with the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, or can also be applied separately.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 can be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device can be a network device or can support network device implementation.
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system. The same is true for the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • the access network device described below may be For the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A, the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A. Or, if this embodiment is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, the access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal described below The device may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • S801 The terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the terminal device enters the RRC connection state, that is, establishes an RRC connection with the access network device, and this process is not described in detail.
  • the terminal device enters the RRC connected state in the first cell as the second user.
  • the access network device sends the first configuration to the terminal device of the second user identity, and the terminal device receives the first configuration from the access network device as the second user identity.
  • the first configuration may include one or more of physical layer configuration, measurement configuration, or air interface parameter configuration.
  • the first configuration includes physical layer configuration; or, the first configuration includes measurement configuration; or, the first configuration includes physical layer configuration and measurement configuration; or, the first configuration includes air interface parameter configuration; or, the first configuration may include physical Layer configuration, measurement configuration, and air interface parameter configuration, etc.
  • the physical layer configuration can include one of the following parameters or any combination of the following multiple parameters: bandwidth part (BWP) configuration, multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) parameter configuration, power control Parameter configuration, physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) configuration, physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) configuration, physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) configuration, or physical uplink sharing Channel (physical uplink shared channel, PUSCH) configuration.
  • BWP bandwidth part
  • MIMO multiple-input multiple-output
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • PUCCH physical uplink control channel
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink sharing Channel
  • the physical layer configuration includes BWP configuration; or, the physical layer configuration includes MIMO configuration and power control parameter configuration; or, the physical layer configuration includes PDCCH configuration, PUCCH configuration, PDSCH configuration, and PUSCH configuration; or, the physical layer configuration includes BWP configuration, Power control parameter configuration, PDCCH configuration, PUCCH configuration, PDSCH configuration, PUSCH configuration, etc.
  • the measurement configuration may include configuration information of parameters related to the measurement performed by the terminal device.
  • the measurement configuration may include a measurement period configured for the terminal device, or may include a measurement interval (gap) configured for the terminal device.
  • the air interface parameter configuration may include other air interface parameter configuration information in addition to C-RNTI, security parameter configuration, and data radio bearer configuration.
  • the terminal device can use the first configuration as the second user. For example, if the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration, the terminal device can use the second user identity to send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration, or for example, if the first configuration includes a measurement configuration, the terminal device can use the second user identity to send and receive data according to the measurement configuration. Perform measurement.
  • S803 The terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the first user.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the second user, the terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the first user again. For example, the terminal device enters the RRC connected state in the first cell as the second user. Similarly, the process of the terminal device entering the RRC connected state will not be described in detail.
  • the access network device sends a first message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device as the first user identity, and the first message is used to indicate the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user.
  • the user identity shares the first configuration or shares the physical layer. Among them, sharing the physical layer can be understood as sharing the physical layer configuration.
  • the access network device knows in advance that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, and it is determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell. Then, after the access network device finds that the terminal device first enters the RRC connected state as the second user, and then enters the RRC connected state as the first user, it can send a first message to the terminal device, indicating the identity of the first user Share the first configuration or share the physical layer with the second user identity, or indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share the same set of configurations.
  • the first message includes, for example, third indication information, and the third information may indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share the first configuration.
  • S805 may be executed, that is, the terminal device sends a second message to the access network device as the first user.
  • the second message may include the second identifier, and the second identifier may be the first user. 2.
  • the identity of the user identity, the identity of the second user identity is, for example, the C-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the second message includes the second identity, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same Terminal Equipment.
  • the second message may further include first indication information, and the first indication information is used for the configuration used by the first user identity to request the use of the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and according to the first indication information, it can be determined that the first user identity and the second user identity can use the same configuration.
  • the first indication information is used for the first user identity to request the sharing of the first configuration or the sharing of the physical layer with the second user identity, where the shared physical layer can be understood as sharing the physical layer configuration.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC setup complete (RRC setup complete) message or an RRC resume complete (RRC resume complete) message, or other messages, such as a newly introduced RRC message, and the name of the newly introduced RRC message For example, it is a multiple SIM information (multiple SIM information) message.
  • RRC setup complete RRC setup complete
  • RRC resume complete RRC resume complete
  • the terminal device uses the identity of the first user to send and receive data and/or perform measurement according to the first configuration, where the first configuration is a configuration used by the terminal device as the second user.
  • the terminal device uses the first configuration used by the second user identity for the first user identity. For example, if the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration, the terminal device can send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration as the first user, or for example, if the first configuration includes a measurement configuration, the terminal device can use the first user identity according to the measurement configuration. Perform measurement.
  • the access network device determines the first user The identity and the second user identity can use the same configuration. Also, because the access network device has already sent the first configuration to the terminal device of the second user identity, the access network device does not need to send the first configuration to the terminal device of the first user identity anymore, and the terminal device can realize internal sharing. In other words, the terminal device can use the first configuration used by the second user identity, or in other words, use the first configuration received as the second user identity for the first user identity, so that the two user identities can share the same set of configurations.
  • the access network device only needs to send the first configuration once, and does not need to send the first configuration to the two user identities separately, which saves signaling overhead.
  • the access network device only needs to be configured once, that is, the access network device only needs to obtain the first configuration, and there is no need to determine different configurations for different user identities, which reduces the configuration process of the access network device.
  • Two user identities of the same terminal device share the same first configuration, or share the same physical layer, so that a dual-card dual-standby terminal device is capable of achieving dual-card dual-activation effects and improves user experience.
  • the access network device sends a third message to the terminal device, where the third message is used to modify the first configuration.
  • the terminal device receives the third message from the access network device, and determines to modify the first configuration according to the third message.
  • the access network device may modify the first configuration. For example, the access network device modifies the values of all parameters or the values of some parameters in the first configuration. Then the access network device needs to send the modification information to the terminal device so that the terminal device can modify the first configuration.
  • the access network device may send a third message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device may receive the third message from the access network device as the first user identity; or the access network device may send the third message to the second user identity.
  • the terminal device sends a third message, and the terminal device receives the third message from the access network device as the second user. That is, the access network device only needs to send the third message to the terminal device once, and there is no need to send the third message to different user identities, which saves signaling overhead.
  • FIG. 8 takes an example in which the access network device sends a third message to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • different user identities correspond to the same set of configurations.
  • the access network equipment only needs to be modified for one set of configuration (the first configuration). There is no need to modify the configurations corresponding to different user identities, which reduces the cost of access network equipment. Workload.
  • S808 The terminal device modifies the first configuration based on the third message.
  • the terminal device After receiving the third message, the terminal device can modify the first configuration according to the third message, and the first configuration before the modification is no longer used, thus completing the update of the configuration information.
  • the terminal device may modify the first configuration as the first user to obtain the modified first configuration.
  • FIG. 8 takes as an example the terminal device modifying the first configuration as the first user.
  • the terminal device uses the modified first configuration as the first user, and uses the modified first configuration as the second user.
  • the terminal device After obtaining the modified first configuration, the terminal device can use the modified first configuration as the first user. Since the first user identity and the second user identity can share the same set of configurations, the terminal device can also use the modified first configuration as the second user.
  • the modified first configuration includes the physical layer configuration
  • the terminal device uses the modified first configuration as the first user.
  • the terminal device can use the first user identity to send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration, or
  • the modified first configuration includes a measurement configuration, and the terminal device can perform measurement according to the measurement configuration as the first user.
  • the access network device determines that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, or determines that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user, or determines that the terminal device is the first user
  • the identity changes the serving cell to the second cell, and it is determined that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user identity (wherein, since the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, if you want to change In the serving cell, both user identities may change the serving cell and change to the same cell. Therefore, the access network equipment only needs to determine that one of the user identities needs to change the serving cell, or the access network The device can also determine that the two user identities must change the serving cell).
  • the access network device may not operate, but if the second cell The cell and the first cell do not belong to the same access network device, the access network device may send second indication information to the first access network device, and the second indication information may indicate the first user identity and the second user identity Belonging to the same terminal device, the first access network device is the access network device to which the second cell belongs.
  • the first access network device may be The access network device 2 in Figure 3B.
  • the first access network device After the first access network device receives the second indication information from the access network device, it can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, and that is, the first user identity and the second user identity can be determined The identity always has the same serving cell. Then, if the first access network device also needs to send a corresponding configuration to the terminal device, the first access network device also only needs to send a set of configurations to the terminal device, and two user identities can share this set of configurations. This configuration is called the second configuration, for example. Regarding the content that the second configuration may include, refer to the introduction to the first configuration. The two are similar.
  • the method may further include the following S810.
  • S810 The terminal device sends reference information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the reference information from the terminal device.
  • the reference information includes, for example, a reference signal, or includes a measurement report, or includes a reference signal and a measurement report.
  • the reference signal is, for example, a sounding reference signal (SRS), or may also be other reference signals.
  • the measurement report includes, for example, a channel state information (CSI) report, or a channel quality indicator (CQI) report, or a CSI report and a CQI report, and so on.
  • CSI channel state information
  • CQI channel quality indicator
  • the terminal device can send reference information to the access network device as the first user, and the access network device receives the reference information from the terminal device of the first user identity; or the terminal device can send the reference information to the access network device as the second user.
  • the device sends the reference information, and the access network device receives the reference information from the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • FIG. 8 takes as an example the terminal device sending reference information to the access network device as the second user. Since the first user identity and the second user identity share the same set of configurations, the terminal device performs measurement as the first user identity and performs measurement as the second user identity. The measurement results obtained may be the same or similar.
  • the terminal The device sends the reference signal to the access network device as the first user, and sends the reference signal to the access network device as the second user, and the properties of the sent reference signals are also the same or similar. Therefore, in the embodiment of this application, the terminal device only needs to perform measurement through one user identity, and only needs to use one user identity to send reference information to the access network device.
  • the reference information sent by the device helps to save signaling overhead and reduces the implementation complexity of the terminal device. Moreover, even if the terminal device sends reference information to the access network device through different user identities, the sent reference information may be similar. Therefore, allowing the terminal device to send reference information to the access network device through only one user identity can also reduce Redundant information.
  • the access network device may apply the received reference information to the first user identity and the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the CSI report from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the access network device can perform channel estimation based on the CSI report, so that the terminal device can be scheduled according to the result of the channel estimation. Then, the access network device can schedule the terminal device of the first user identity according to the result of the channel estimation, and can also schedule the terminal device of the second user identity according to the result of the channel estimation.
  • the access network device receives the SRS from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the access network device can perform measurement according to the SRS, so that the terminal device can be scheduled according to the measurement result. Then, the access network device can schedule the terminal device of the first user identity according to the measurement result, and can also schedule the terminal device of the second user identity according to the measurement result.
  • the access network device may not schedule "users" corresponding to the two user identities at the same time. Then, the method may also include the following S811.
  • the terminal device sends third indication information to the access network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user identity, or does not support the simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user. Identity.
  • the access network device receives the third indication information from the terminal device. If the third indication information indicates that the terminal device supports the simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user identity, the access network device can determine that the terminal device supports simultaneous scheduling according to the third indication information.
  • the access network device can determine that the terminal device does not support the third indication information The first user identity and the second user identity are scheduled at the same time.
  • the terminal device can determine whether to support simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user identity according to the capabilities of the terminal device, and can send the determined result to the access network device.
  • the access network device can determine whether the data of two user identities can be scheduled at the same time based on the third indication information reported by the terminal device, so that the scheduling of the access network device conforms to the actual capabilities of the terminal device.
  • scheduling two user identities at the same time may refer to scheduling two user identities within the same scheduling time unit.
  • the scheduling time unit is, for example, a transmission time interval (TTI) or a time slot (slot).
  • the terminal device may send third indication information to the access network device as the first user, and the access network device receives the third indication information from the terminal device of the first user identity; or the terminal device may be the second user identity Send the third instruction information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the third instruction information from the terminal device of the second user identity; or the terminal device may send the third instruction information to the access network device as the first user identity ,
  • the third instruction information is also sent to the access network device as the second user.
  • the access network device can receive the third instruction information from the terminal device with the first user identity, or it can receive the third instruction information from the terminal device with the second user identity.
  • the third instruction information If the third indication information is sent to the access network equipment through both user identities, it can be used for verification.
  • FIG. 8 is an example in which the terminal device sends the third indication information to the access network device under the identity of the second user, and the access network device receives the third indication information from the terminal device of the second user identity as an example.
  • S810, S811 or S810 and S811 can be implemented independently of other steps.
  • S807 to S809 may be independently implemented steps.
  • different user identities can share the same set of configurations, so that the access network device only needs to configure one terminal device once, which reduces the configuration process of the access network device.
  • the access network device only needs to send the first configuration to the terminal device once, and there is no need to send the first configuration to different user identities, which saves signaling overhead.
  • the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 allows the first user identity and the second user identity to share the same set of configurations under the condition that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides another communication method, which still allows the first user identity and the second user identity to share the same set of configurations under the condition that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell , which is equivalent to another method for letting the first user identity and the second user identity share the same set of configurations under the condition that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • Figure 9 is a flowchart of the communication method.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 can be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device can be a network device or can support network device implementation.
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system. The same is true for the second communication device.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • the access network device described below may be For the access network device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A, the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3A. Or, if this embodiment is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, the access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal described below The device may be a terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • S901 The terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the terminal device enters the RRC connection state, that is, establishes an RRC connection with the access network device, and this process is not described in detail.
  • the terminal device enters the RRC connected state in the first cell as the second user.
  • the access network device sends the first configuration to the terminal device of the second user identity, and the terminal device receives the first configuration from the access network device as the second user identity.
  • the terminal device can use the first configuration as the second user. For example, if the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration, the terminal device can use the second user identity to send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration, or for example, if the first configuration includes a measurement configuration, the terminal device can use the second user identity to send and receive data according to the measurement configuration. Perform measurement.
  • the terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the first user.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the second user, the terminal device enters the RRC connected state as the first user again. For example, the terminal device enters the RRC connected state in the first cell as the second user. Similarly, the process of the terminal device entering the RRC connected state will not be described in detail.
  • the access network device sends a first message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives the first message from the access network device as the first user identity, and the first message is used to indicate the identity of the first user and the identity of the second user.
  • the user identity shares the first configuration or shares the physical layer. Among them, sharing the physical layer can be understood as sharing the physical layer configuration.
  • the access network device knows in advance that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, and it is determined that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell. Then, after the access network device finds that the terminal device has entered the RRC connected state as the second user first, and then enters the RRC connected state as the first user, it can send a first message to the terminal device to indicate the identity of the first user Share the first configuration or share the physical layer with the second user identity, or indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share the same set of configurations.
  • the first message includes, for example, third indication information, and the third information may indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share the first configuration.
  • S905 can be executed, and the terminal device sends a second message to the access network device as the first user.
  • the second message can include the second identifier, and the second identifier can be the second user.
  • the identity of the identity, the identity of the second user identity is, for example, the C-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and the second message includes the second identity, so that the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same Terminal Equipment.
  • the second message may further include first indication information, and the first indication information is used for the configuration used by the first user identity to request the use of the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, and according to the first indication information, it can be determined that the first user identity and the second user identity can use the same configuration.
  • the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request to share the first configuration or to share the physical layer with the second user identity, where the shared physical layer can be understood as sharing the physical layer configuration.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC setup complete message or an RRC resume complete message, or other messages, such as a newly introduced RRC message, and the name of the newly introduced RRC message is, for example, a multiple SIM information message.
  • the access network device sends the first configuration to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives the first configuration from the access network device as the first user identity.
  • the access network device determines the first user The identity and the second user identity can use the same configuration. Therefore, the access network device does not need to perform additional configuration for the terminal device of the first user identity, but can directly send the first configuration to the terminal device of the first user identity, so that for the terminal device, the two user identities use The configuration is the same, both are the first configuration, two user identities are equivalent to sharing the same set of configuration. In this way, the access network device only needs to be configured once, that is, the access network device only needs to obtain the first configuration, and there is no need to determine different configurations for different user identities, which reduces the configuration process of the access network device.
  • Two user identities of the same terminal device share the same first configuration, or share the same physical layer, so that a dual-card dual-standby terminal device is capable of achieving dual-card dual-activation effects and improves user experience.
  • the terminal device uses the identity of the first user to send and receive data and/or perform measurement according to the first configuration, where the first configuration is a configuration used by the terminal device as the second user.
  • the terminal device uses the first configuration used by the second user identity for the first user identity. For example, if the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration, the terminal device can send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration as the first user, or for example, if the first configuration includes a measurement configuration, the terminal device can use the first user identity according to the measurement configuration. Perform measurement.
  • the access network device sends a third message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the third message is used to modify the first configuration.
  • the terminal device receives the third message from the access network device as the first user, and determines to modify the first configuration according to the third message.
  • the access network device may modify the first configuration. For example, the access network device modifies the values of all parameters or the values of some parameters in the first configuration. Then the access network device needs to send the modification information to the terminal device of the first user identity, so that the terminal device can modify the first configuration as the first user.
  • the terminal device modifies the first configuration based on the third message.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the third message as the first user, it can modify the first configuration according to the third message. For example, the terminal device modifies the first configuration as the first user to obtain the modified first configuration. For the first user identity, the first configuration before modification is no longer used, thus completing the update of the configuration used for the first user identity.
  • the terminal device uses the identity of the first user to send and receive data and/or perform measurement according to the modified first configuration.
  • the terminal device uses the modified first configuration as the first user.
  • the terminal device can use the first user identity to send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration, or for example, if the modified first configuration includes the measurement configuration, the terminal device can use the first The user identity performs the measurement according to the measurement configuration.
  • the access network device sends a fourth message to the terminal device of the second user identity, where the fourth message is used to instruct to modify the first configuration.
  • the terminal device receives the fourth message from the access network device as the second user, and determines to modify the first configuration according to the fourth message.
  • the access network device modifies the first configuration
  • the access network device not only needs to send the modification information to the terminal device of the first user identity, but also sends the modification information to the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the terminal device can modify the first configuration as the first user, and can also modify the first configuration as the second user.
  • the access network device since the first user identity and the second user identity share the same set of configurations, the access network device only needs to modify one set of configurations (the first configuration), and there is no need to perform operations on it. Multiple sets of configurations are modified separately, which reduces the workload of the access network equipment.
  • the terminal device modifies the first configuration based on the fourth message.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the fourth message as the second user, it can modify the first configuration according to the fourth message. For example, the terminal device modifies the first configuration as the second user to obtain the modified first configuration.
  • Fig. 9 takes as an example the terminal device modifying the first configuration as the second user. For the second user identity, the first configuration before modification is no longer used, thus completing the update of the configuration used for the first user identity.
  • S913 The terminal device uses the identity of the second user to send and receive data and/or perform measurement according to the modified first configuration.
  • the terminal device uses the modified first configuration as the second user.
  • the terminal device can use the second user identity to send and receive data according to the physical layer configuration, or for example, if the modified first configuration includes a measurement configuration, the terminal device can use the second The user identity performs the measurement according to the measurement configuration.
  • S908 ⁇ S910 can be regarded as a process
  • S911 ⁇ S913 can be regarded as a process
  • S908 ⁇ S910 can be executed before S911 ⁇ S913; or, S908 ⁇ S910 can be executed after S911 ⁇ S913; or, S908 ⁇ S910, and From S911 to S913, the two processes can be executed at the same time.
  • the access network device determines that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, or determines that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user, or determines that the terminal device is the first user
  • the identity changes the serving cell to the second cell, and it is determined that the terminal device changes the serving cell to the second cell as the second user identity (wherein, since the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell, if you want to change Cell, both user identities may change the serving cell and change to the same cell.
  • the access network equipment only needs to determine one of the user’s identities to change the serving cell, or the access network equipment It can also be determined that the two user identities must change the serving cell), then if the second cell and the first cell both belong to the access network device, the access network device may not operate, but if the second cell If it does not belong to the same access network device as the first cell, the access network device may send second indication information to the first access network device, and the second indication information may indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to For the same terminal device, the first access network device is the access network device to which the second cell belongs. For example, if the technical solution of this embodiment is applied to the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, the first access network device may be as shown in FIG.
  • Access network equipment 2 in 3B After the first access network device receives the second indication information from the access network device, it can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device, and that is, the first user identity and the second user identity can be determined The identity always has the same serving cell. Then, if the first access network device also needs to send a corresponding configuration to the terminal device, the first access network device also only needs to send a set of configurations to the terminal device, and two user identities can share this set of configurations. This configuration is called the second configuration, for example. Regarding the content that the second configuration may include, refer to the introduction to the first configuration. The two are similar.
  • the method may further include the following S914.
  • S914 The terminal device sends reference information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the reference information from the terminal device.
  • the terminal device can send reference information to the access network device as the first user, and the access network device receives the reference information from the terminal device of the first user identity; or the terminal device can send the reference information to the access network device as the second user.
  • the device sends the reference information, and the access network device receives the reference information from the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • FIG. 9 takes as an example the terminal device sending reference information to the access network device as the second user.
  • the access network device may not schedule "users" corresponding to the two user identities at the same time. Then, the method may also include the following S915.
  • the terminal device sends third indication information to the access network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate that the terminal device supports the simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user identity, or does not support the simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user. Identity.
  • the access network device receives the third indication information from the terminal device. If the third indication information indicates that the terminal device supports the simultaneous scheduling of the first user identity and the second user identity, the access network device can determine that the terminal device supports simultaneous scheduling according to the third indication information.
  • the access network device can determine that the terminal device does not support the third indication information The first user identity and the second user identity are scheduled at the same time.
  • the terminal device may send third indication information to the access network device as the first user, and the access network device receives the third indication information from the terminal device of the first user identity; or the terminal device may be the second user identity Send the third instruction information to the access network device, and the access network device receives the third instruction information from the terminal device of the second user identity; or the terminal device may send the third instruction information to the access network device as the first user identity ,
  • the third instruction information is also sent to the access network device as the second user.
  • the access network device can receive the third instruction information from the terminal device with the first user identity, or it can receive the third instruction information from the terminal device with the second user identity.
  • the third instruction information If the third indication information is sent to the access network equipment through both user identities, it can be used for verification.
  • FIG. 9 takes as an example the terminal device sending the third instruction information to the access network device under the identity of the second user, and the access network device receives the third instruction information from the terminal device of the second user identity as an example.
  • different user identities can share the same set of configurations, so that the access network device only needs to configure one terminal device once, which reduces the configuration process of the access network device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. Please refer to FIG. 10, which is a flowchart of the communication method.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 can be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be executed by two communication devices, such as a first communication device and a second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • the first access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the network device described herein may be the access network device 2 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B
  • the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the network device (for example, the network device that may be the access network device 2 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B) is also referred to as the second access network device.
  • the terminal device sends a first message to the first access network device as the first user identity, and the first access network device receives the first message from the terminal device with the first user identity.
  • the first message may carry a second identifier, and the second identifier is an identifier of the second user identity.
  • the first user identity is in the RRC connected state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC inactive state.
  • the first message is, for example, an RRC message, such as an RRC resume complete message, or other RRC messages, such as a newly introduced RRC message, and the name may be a multiple SIM information message.
  • the first access network device determines according to the second identity that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the terminal device.
  • the second identifier is, for example, an inactive Radio network temporary identifier (I-RNTI) of the second user's identity, or may also be another identifier of the second user's identity, as long as the second identifier can indicate the second user Identity is fine.
  • the first access network device receives the first message from the terminal device of the first user identity. Therefore, the first access network device can obtain the information of the first user identity according to the first message, for example, obtain the first identity, An identification may be an identification of the identity of the first user.
  • the first message also includes the second identifier. Therefore, the first access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device according to the first message.
  • the first access network device also knows that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the first identifier is the C-RNTI and serving cell information of the first user identity
  • the second identifier is the I-RNTI of the second user identity
  • the first access network device may establish the C-RNTI of the first user identity. And the association relationship between the serving cell information and the I-RNTI of the second user identity to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the first access network device sends the second identification to the second access network device, the second access network device receives the second identification from the first access network device, and the second access network device stores the second identification 2.
  • Access network equipment in the context of user identity.
  • the context of the second user identity in the RRC inactive state is stored in the second access network device. It can also be considered that the second access network device is the anchor point access network device of the second user identity.
  • the first access network device and the second access network device may be the same access network device, or may also be different access network devices. If the first access network device and the second access network device are the same access network device, then S1003 does not need to be executed, or if the first access network device and the second access network device are different access network devices Device, S1003 may be executed. For example, the first access network device may send the second identifier to the second access network device through the Xn interface.
  • the second identifier may indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides in the cell under the first access network device, or in other words, the second identifier may indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides on the first access network device.
  • the second access network device determines that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connected state. In other words, the second access network device determines that the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the second access network device may determine that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connection state to receive the downlink data. Or in some other cases, the second access network device may also determine that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connected state.
  • S1004 is also executed by the first access network device.
  • the second access network device only sends a third message to the first access network device, and the first access network device receives the third message from the second access network device, and the third message is used to instruct to page the second
  • S1006 and S1007 can be executed, or S1008 and S1009 can also be executed, that is, S1006 and S1007, and S1008 and S1009, are in a relationship of alternative execution. Whether to execute S1006 and S1007 or to execute S1008 and S1009 can be stipulated by agreement or determined by the access network equipment.
  • the second access network device only sends the third message to the first access network device, which means that the second access network device can only send the third message to the first access network device, but not Send the third message to other access network devices.
  • the second access network device After the second access network device receives the second identifier, it can determine the access network device corresponding to the second identifier, that is, the first access network device, so that it can be determined that the second user identity corresponding to the second identifier resides in the first The cell under the access network equipment. Then, if the second user identity corresponding to the second identifier needs to enter the RRC connection state, the second access network device only needs to send a third message to the first access network device, and no other access network devices are required. Sending the third message can reduce the number of third messages and the number of paging on the air interface, thereby saving transmission overhead.
  • the third message is, for example, a paging message.
  • the paging message may carry the second identifier.
  • the first access network device determines, according to the second identifier, that the cell where the terminal device with the second user identity currently resides is the serving cell where the terminal device with the first user identity is located.
  • the third message carries the second identifier, and the second identifier is, for example, the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the first access network device has stored the association relationship between the C-RNTI of the first user identity and the I-RNTI of the second user identity. Then the first access network device can determine the first access network device by querying the association relationship.
  • a user identity and a second user identity belong to the same terminal device, so that the first access network device can determine that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is the current serving cell of the terminal device of the first user identity.
  • the current serving cell of the terminal device of the first user identity is the first cell, and the first access network device may determine that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is also the first cell.
  • the first access network device only sends a paging message in the serving cell of the first user identity, and the terminal device detects (or monitors) the paging message in the serving cell as the second user identity.
  • the first access network device determines that the cell where the terminal device with the second user identity currently resides is the current serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity, then the first access network device only needs to send a page in the serving cell Messages are sufficient, and there is no need to send paging messages in other cells, which can reduce the number of paging messages and save transmission overhead.
  • the paging message may carry a second identifier, so that after the terminal device monitors the paging message as the second user identity, it can be determined according to the second identifier that the paging message is a paging message corresponding to the second user identity , The terminal device can enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the first access network device determines the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the second identifier.
  • the second identifier is the I-RNTI of the second user identity
  • the first access network device can find the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • the first access network device sends a second message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives the second message as the first user identity.
  • the second message may indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connection state. Or indicate that a paging message arrives with the identity of the second user.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC message.
  • the first access network device does not need to send a paging message on the air interface, but can directly send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, that is, send the RRC message to the first user identity to trigger the second
  • the user identity (for example, triggered internally by the terminal device, for example, inside the terminal device, the module of the first user identity can notify the module of the second user identity) enters the RRC connection state, thereby saving the overhead of paging messages.
  • the second user identity in the RRC inactive state does not need to monitor the air interface paging message, which also makes the terminal device more power-saving.
  • the first access network device as the source access network device of the first user identity, can send the I-RNTI of the second user identity to the target access of the first user identity ⁇ Net equipment.
  • the target access network device can access the second access network device (that is, the anchor access network device of the second user identity, or the context of the terminal device that stores the second user identity) through the Xn interface.
  • Network device sends a message, for example called the fifth message, the fifth message can carry the I-RNTI of the second user identity, so that the second access network device can update the location of the second user identity to the target access network device .
  • the second access network device only needs to send a paging message to the target access network device, and it is not necessary to send a paging message to the first access network device. In this way, the information of the access network device where the second user identity resides can be updated in time.
  • the access network device that stores the context of the user identity of the terminal device can more accurately know the access network device where the user identity of the terminal device resides or the resident access network device Cells, so there is no need to send paging messages to multiple access network devices or multiple cells, which helps to save the overhead of paging messages.
  • the first access network device can also know the cell where the user identity of the terminal device resides, so that only the paging message needs to be sent in the cell, which can further save the overhead of the paging message.
  • the first access network device may not need to send a paging message, but directly send an RRC message to the corresponding user identity, which can save the overhead of the paging message to a greater extent.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a communication method. Please refer to FIG. 11, which is a flowchart of the communication method. The method continues to consider solving the paging problem under the condition that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the difference from the embodiment shown in Fig. 10 is that in the embodiment shown in Fig. 11, the second user identity is in the RRC idle state, while in the embodiment shown in Fig. 11, the second user identity is in the RRC inactive state. state.
  • the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 may be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network device or can support network device implementation
  • the communication device with the functions required by the method, or the first communication device may be a terminal device or a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and of course it may also be another communication device, such as a chip system.
  • the second communication device may be executed by two communication devices, for example, the first communication device and the second communication device, where the first communication device may be a network
  • the second communication device may be a network device or a communication device capable of supporting the functions required by the network device to implement the method, or the second communication device may be a terminal device or capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the method.
  • the communication device with the required functions can of course also be other communication devices, such as a chip system.
  • the first communication device may be a network device
  • the second communication device may be a terminal device, or both the first communication device and the second communication device
  • the network device, or the first communication device and the second communication device are both terminal devices, or the first communication device is a network device
  • the second communication device is a communication device capable of supporting the terminal device to implement the functions required by the method, and so on.
  • the method is executed by a network device and a terminal device as an example, that is, it is assumed that the first communication device is a network device and the second communication device is a network device.
  • the access network device described below may be the access network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the core network device described may be the core network device 1 in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B, and the terminal device described below may be the terminal device in the network architecture shown in FIG. 3B.
  • the terminal device sends a first message to the access network device with the identity of the first user, and the access network device receives the first message from the terminal device with the identity of the first user.
  • the first message may carry a second identifier, and the second identifier is an identifier of the second user identity.
  • the first user identity is in the RRC connected state
  • the second user identity is in the RRC idle state.
  • the first message is, for example, an RRC message, such as an RRC resume complete message, or other RRC messages, such as a newly introduced RRC message, and the name may be a multiple SIM information message.
  • the access network device determines according to the second identity that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the terminal device.
  • the second identifier is, for example, the S-TMSI of the second user identity, or may also be other identifiers of the second user identity, as long as the second identity can indicate the second user identity.
  • the access network device receives the first message from the terminal device of the first user identity. Therefore, the access network device can obtain the information of the first user identity according to the first message. For example, the first identity can be obtained.
  • the first identity may be The identity of the first user.
  • the first message also includes the second identifier, so the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device according to the first message.
  • the access network device also knows that the first user identity and the second user identity always have the same serving cell.
  • the first identifier is the C-RNTI of the first user identity and the information of the serving cell
  • the second identifier is the S-TMSI of the second user identity
  • the first access network device may establish the C-RNTI of the first user identity.
  • the association relationship between the information of the RNTI and the serving cell and the S-TMSI of the second user identity to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the access network device sends the second identifier to the core network device, and the core network device receives the second identifier from the access network device.
  • the core network device is the serving core network device of the terminal device of the first user identity.
  • the second identifier may indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides in the cell under the first access network device, or in other words, the second identifier may indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides on the first access network device.
  • the core network device determines that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connected state. In other words, the core network device determines that the terminal device needs to enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the core network device may determine that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connection state to receive the downlink data. Or in some other cases, the core network device may also determine that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connected state.
  • the core network device only sends a third message to the access network device, and the access network device receives the third message from the core network device.
  • the third message is used to instruct to page the terminal device of the second user identity or instruct the terminal device Enter the RRC connection state as the second user.
  • S1106 and S1107 can be executed, or, S1108 and S1109 can also be executed, or S1110 and S1111 can also be executed, that is, S1106 and S1107, S1108 and S1109, and S1110 and S1111, are alternatively executed.
  • S1106 and S1107, S1108 and S1109, or S1110 and S1111 can be stipulated by agreement or determined by the access network equipment.
  • the core network device only sends the third message to the access network device, which means that the core network device will only send the third message to the access network device, and will not send the third message to other access network devices. news.
  • the core network device may determine the access network device corresponding to the second identifier, that is, the first access network device. For example, the core network device may determine that the second user identity corresponding to the second identifier is camping. Under the access network equipment. Then, if the second user identity corresponding to the second identifier needs to enter the RRC connected state, the core network device only needs to send the third message to the access network device, and no longer needs to send the third message to other access network devices. , This can reduce the number of third messages and save transmission overhead.
  • the third message is, for example, a paging message.
  • the paging message may carry the second identifier.
  • the third message is, for example, an N2 message
  • the N2 message may correspond to the identity of the first user.
  • the core network device may send a message corresponding to the first user identity to the access network device through the N2 connection with the first user identity. Because the message is sent through the N2 connection, the message may be called an N2 message.
  • the N2 message corresponds to the first user identity, which can be understood as that the N2 message carries the AMF UE next generation application protocol (NGAP) ID and RAN UE NGAP ID of the first user identity. That is, the core network sends an N2 message for the first user identity to the access network device, and the N2 message instructs to page the terminal device of the second user identity or instructs the terminal device to enter the RRC connection state as the second user identity.
  • NGAP AMF UE next generation application protocol
  • the access network device determines, according to the second identifier, that the cell where the terminal device with the second user identity currently resides is the serving cell where the terminal device with the first user identity is located.
  • the third message is a paging message.
  • the third message carries the second identifier.
  • the second identifier is, for example, the S-TMSI of the second user identity.
  • the access network device has stored the C-RNTI of the first user identity and the information of the serving cell and the information of the second user identity.
  • S-TMSI the access network device can determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device by querying the relationship, so that the access network device can determine the identity of the second user
  • the cell where the terminal device currently resides is the current serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity.
  • the current serving cell of the terminal device of the first user identity is the first cell
  • the access network device may determine that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is also the first cell.
  • the access network device only sends a paging message in the serving cell of the terminal device with the identity of the first user, and the terminal device detects (or monitors) the paging message in the serving cell with the identity of the second user.
  • the access network device determines that the cell where the terminal device with the second user identity currently resides is the current serving cell of the terminal device with the first user identity. Then, the access network device only needs to send a paging message in the serving cell. There is no need to send paging messages in other cells, which can reduce the number of paging messages and save transmission overhead.
  • the paging message may carry a second identifier, so that after the terminal device monitors the paging message as the second user identity, it can be determined according to the second identifier that the paging message is a paging message corresponding to the second user identity , The terminal device can enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the access network device determines the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the second identifier.
  • the third message is a paging message.
  • the second identity is the S-TMSI of the second user identity
  • the access network device can find the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the S-TMSI of the second user identity.
  • the access network device sends a second message to the terminal device of the first user identity, and the terminal device receives the second message as the first user identity.
  • the second message may indicate that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connection state or indicate the second user.
  • a paging message arrives for the identity.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC message.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the second message as the first user, it can trigger the terminal device to enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the access network device does not need to send a paging message on the air interface, but can directly send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, that is, trigger the second user identity by sending the RRC message to the first user identity (For example, triggered internally by the terminal device, for example, inside the terminal device, the module of the first user identity can notify the module of the second user identity) enter the RRC connection state, thereby saving the overhead of paging messages.
  • the second user identity in the RRC inactive state does not need to monitor the air interface paging message, which also makes the terminal device more power-saving.
  • the access network device determines the context information of the first user identity according to the N2 message.
  • the third message is an N2 message.
  • the N2 message carries the AMF UE NGAP ID and RAN UE NGAP ID of the first user identity, so that the access network device can determine the context information of the first user identity according to the N2 message.
  • the access network device sends a second message to the terminal device of the first user identity.
  • the terminal device receives the second message as the first user identity.
  • the second message is used to indicate that the second user identity needs to enter the RRC connection state or indicate the second user identity.
  • a paging message arrives for the identity of the user.
  • the second message is, for example, an RRC message.
  • the terminal device After the terminal device receives the second message as the first user, it can trigger the second user to enter the RRC connected state. For example, the terminal device can trigger the second user to enter the RRC connected state as the first user, or as the first user. Indicates that a paging message has arrived for the second user identity.
  • the access network device does not need to send a paging message on the air interface, but can directly send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, that is, trigger the second user identity by sending the RRC message to the first user identity (For example, triggered internally by the terminal device, for example, inside the terminal device, the module of the first user identity can notify the module of the second user identity) enter the RRC connection state, thereby saving the overhead of paging messages.
  • the second user identity in the RRC inactive state does not need to monitor the air interface paging message, which also makes the terminal device more power-saving.
  • the access network device serves as the source network device of the first user identity and can send the second identity of the second user identity (for example, the S-TMSI of the second user identity)
  • the target access network device given the identity of the first user.
  • the core network device sends a page to the target access network device of the first user identity to page the second user identity
  • the target access network device of the first user identity can use the above method to only access the terminal device of the first user identity.
  • the serving cell sends a paging message, or sends a second message to the terminal device of the first user identity to trigger the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state.
  • the core network device can more accurately know the access network device or the cell in which the user identity of the terminal device resides, so that there is no need to contact multiple access network devices or multiple access network devices.
  • the cell sends paging messages, which helps to save the overhead of paging messages.
  • the access network device can also know the cell where the user identity of the terminal device resides, so that only the paging message needs to be sent in the cell, which can further save the overhead of the paging message.
  • the access network device may not need to send a paging message, but directly send an RRC message to the corresponding user identity, which can save the overhead of the paging message to a greater extent.
  • the core network device may also directly send the RRC message to the corresponding user identity without sending a paging message, which can save the overhead of the paging message to a greater extent.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1200 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication apparatus 1200 is a terminal device 1200, for example.
  • the terminal device 1200 includes a processing module 1210.
  • a transceiver module 1220 may also be included.
  • the terminal device 1200 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be a transceiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit
  • the processing module 1210 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more central processing units. (central processing unit, CPU).
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1210 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be an input/output interface of a chip system (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 1210 can be used to perform all the operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the transceiving operations, such as S401, S404, and S405, and/or to support the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S402 and S403, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 1210 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S503 to S505, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process.
  • the transceiving module 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501 and S502, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 1210 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S602 to S604, and/or other operations used to support the technology described herein. process.
  • the transceiving module 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S601, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 1210 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operation performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, such as S702, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1220 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, such as S701, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 1220 can be a functional module that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1220 can be used to perform the steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 All sending operations and receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any embodiment.
  • the transceiver module 1220 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 1220 can be considered as a receiving module.
  • the transceiver module 1220 can also be a collective term for two functional modules, the two functional modules are respectively a sending module and a receiving module, the sending module is used to complete the sending operation, for example, the sending module can be used to perform the implementation shown in Figure 4
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module can be used to perform the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. All the receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments shown in 7.
  • the terminal device 1200 supports the first user identity and the second user identity,
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to camp in the first cell as the first user, and to camp in the first cell as the second user;
  • the processing module 1210 is also used to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell;
  • the processing module 1210 is further configured to change the serving cell to the second cell as the first user, and change the serving cell to the second cell as the second user;
  • the home PLMN of the first user identity and the second user identity are the same.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell in the following manner:
  • the terminal device 1200 is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, and is in the RRC inactive state as the second user.
  • RRC idle state or RRC inactive state it is determined to camp on the second cell, where the terminal device 1200 is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, and is in the RRC inactive state as the second user.
  • the cell reselection process is performed based on the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information, wherein the third dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is based on the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information and/or The second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is determined,
  • the first dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the first user
  • the second dedicated cell reselection priority configuration information is used to configure priority information when performing cell reselection as the second user.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine to camp on the second cell through a cell selection process in the following manner:
  • Cell selection is performed with the identity of the first user and/or the identity of the second user, and the second cell is determined to be selected.
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine to camp on the second cell through a cell reselection process in the following manner:
  • the processing module 1210 is configured to determine to change the serving cell to the second cell in the following manner, including:
  • a first message from the access network device is received through the transceiver module 1220.
  • the first message is used to instruct to change the serving cell to the second cell.
  • the terminal device 1200 uses the A user identity is in the RRC connected state, and the second user identity is in the RRC connected state, the RRC idle state, or the RRC inactive state.
  • the terminal device 1200 is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user, and the processing module 1210 is further configured to stop performing cell operations as the second user. Reselection or cell selection.
  • the terminal device 1200 is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user, and the processing module 1210 is further configured to enter the RRC connection as the second user. When in a state, establish a connection with the second cell as the second user.
  • the terminal device 1200 is in the RRC connected state as the second user identity, the first message carries first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the second user A user identity and the second user identity change a serving cell to the second cell.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is also used to:
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is further configured to send third indication information to the core network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate the attribution of the first user identity and the second user identity PLMN is the same.
  • the transceiver module 1220 is further configured to receive fourth indication information from the core network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate the identity of the first user and the second user The identity always has the same serving cell.
  • processing module 1210 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component
  • transceiver module 1220 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1300.
  • the communication apparatus 1300 is a terminal device 1300, for example.
  • the terminal device 1300 may be a communication device, such as a terminal device, or may also be a chip system or the like.
  • the terminal device 1300 includes a processor 1310.
  • a memory 1320 may also be included.
  • a transceiver 1330 may also be included.
  • the memory 1320 stores computer instructions or programs, and the processor 1310 can execute the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1320.
  • the processor 1310 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1320 are executed, the processor 1310 is used to perform the operations performed by the processing module 1210 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 1330 is used to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1220 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal device 1300 may not include the memory 1320.
  • the memory is located outside the terminal device 1300.
  • the processor 1310 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the external memory are executed, the processor 1310 is used to execute the processing performed by the processing module 1210 in the foregoing embodiment. Operation, the transceiver 1330 is used to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1220 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 1330 may be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver 1330 can be used to perform the steps in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 All sending operations and receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any embodiment, for example, when performing a sending operation, the transceiver 1330 can be considered as a transmitter, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver 1330 can be considered as a receiver
  • the transceiver 1330 can also be a collective term for two functional units, the two functional units are respectively a transmitter and a receiver, the transmitter is used to complete the transmission operation, for example, the transmitter can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the receiver is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiver can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. All receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any of the illustrated embodiments.
  • the transceiver 1330 can also be implemented through a communication interface of the chip system, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiving component in a communication device to transmit and receive information through the radio frequency transceiving component.
  • the communication interface can be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the communication interface can be used to execute any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 All sending operations and receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the terminal device.
  • the communication interface when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a sending interface, and when performing a receiving operation, the communication interface can be considered as a receiving interface; or, the communication interface is also It can be a collective term for two functional units. These two functional units are respectively a sending interface and a receiving interface.
  • the sending interface is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the one shown in FIG.
  • the receiving interface is used to complete all the sending operations performed by the terminal device in the terminal device.
  • the receiving interface can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 All receiving operations performed by the terminal device in any of the embodiments.
  • the terminal device 1200 or the terminal device 1300 can implement the function of the terminal device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the terminal device 1200 Or the operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device 1300 is to implement the corresponding process in any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 respectively.
  • the terminal device 1200 or the terminal device 1300 can implement the function of the terminal device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the terminal device 1200 Or the operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device 1300 is to implement the corresponding process in any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 respectively.
  • the terminal device 1200 or the terminal device 1300 can implement the function of the terminal device in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, and the terminal device 1200 Or the operation and/or function of each module in the terminal device 1300 is to implement the corresponding process in any one of
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1400 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 1400 is, for example, a terminal device 1400.
  • the terminal device 1400 includes a processing module 1410.
  • a transceiver module 1420 may also be included.
  • the terminal device 1400 may be a terminal device, or may be a chip applied in the terminal device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 1420 may be a transceiver and may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit.
  • the processing module 1410 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 1420 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1410 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1420 may be an input/output interface of a chip system (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 1410 can be used to perform all the operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 except for the transceiving operations, such as S801, S803, S806, S808, and S809, and/or for supporting the text. Other processes of the described technique.
  • the transceiver module 1420 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, such as S802, S804, S805, S807, S810, and S811, and/or for supporting the technology described herein. Other processes.
  • the processing module 1410 may be used to perform all operations except for the transceiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S901, S903, S907, S909, S910, S912, and S913, and/or Other processes used to support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver module 1420 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S902, S904, S905, S906, S908, S911, S914, and S915, and/or to support the Other processes of the described technology.
  • the transceiver module 1420 may be a functional module that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1420 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 All sending and receiving operations performed by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 1420 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 1420 can be considered as a receiving module; or, the transceiver module 1420 It can also be a collective term for two functional modules.
  • the two functional modules are the sending module and the receiving module.
  • the sending module is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module can be used to execute the embodiment shown in Figure 8 or the embodiment shown in Figure 9.
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. All receive operations.
  • the terminal device 1400 supports the first user identity and the second user identity,
  • the processing module 1410 is configured to enter the RRC connected state from the first cell as the first user;
  • the transceiver module 1420 is configured to receive a first message from an access network device as the first user, where the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration,
  • the first configuration includes a physical layer configuration and/or a measurement configuration;
  • the processing module 1410 is further configured to send and receive data or perform measurement according to the first configuration as the first user identity, where the first configuration is the configuration used by the second user identity;
  • the identity of the second user is in the RRC connected state in the first cell.
  • the transceiver module 1420 is further configured to send a second message to the access network device with the identity of the first user, the second message including the identity of the second user, It is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device 1400.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request sharing of the configuration used for using the second user identity.
  • the transceiver module 1420 is further configured to receive a third message from the access network device, where the third message is used to modify the first configuration
  • the processing module 1410 is further configured to modify the first configuration based on the third message, and use the first user identity and the second user identity to send and receive data or perform measurement according to the modified first configuration.
  • processing module 1410 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component
  • transceiver module 1420 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1500.
  • the communication device 1500 is, for example, a terminal device 1500.
  • the terminal device 1500 may be a communication device, such as a terminal device, or may also be a chip system or the like.
  • the terminal device 1500 includes a processor 1510.
  • a memory 1520 may also be included.
  • a transceiver 1530 may also be included.
  • the memory 1520 stores computer instructions or programs, and the processor 1510 can execute the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1520.
  • the processor 1510 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1520 are executed, the processor 1510 is used to perform the operations performed by the processing module 1410 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 1530 is used to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1420 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal device 1500 may not include the memory 1520.
  • the memory is located outside the terminal device 1500.
  • the processor 1510 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the external memory are executed, the processor 1510 is used to execute what is executed by the processing module 1410 in the foregoing embodiment. Operation, the transceiver 1530 is used to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1420 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 1530 may be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver 1530 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 All sending and receiving operations performed by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver 1530 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a transmitter, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver 1530 can be considered as a receiver; or, the transceiver 1530 It can also be a collective term for two functional units. These two functional units are respectively a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transmitter is used to complete the transmission operation.
  • the transmitter can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the receiver is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiver can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or all the operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 Receive operation.
  • the transceiver 1530 can also be implemented through a communication interface of the chip system, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiving component in a communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiving component.
  • the communication interface can be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the communication interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9
  • the communication interface when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a sending interface, and when performing a receiving operation, the communication interface can be considered as a receiving interface; or, the communication interface can also be two functional units The two functional units are the sending interface and the receiving interface respectively.
  • the sending interface is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the receiving interface is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving interface may be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9.
  • terminal device 1400 or the terminal device 1500 can implement the functions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and the terminal device 1400 or the terminal device 1500 The operation and/or function of each module is to implement the corresponding process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 respectively, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1600 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication apparatus 1600 is, for example, an access network device 1600.
  • the access network device 1600 includes a processing module 1610.
  • a transceiver module 1620 may also be included.
  • the access network device 1600 may be an access network device, or may be a chip applied to the access network device or other combination devices or components having the functions of the access network device described above.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be a transceiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit
  • the processing module 1610 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1610 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be an input/output interface of a chip system (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 1610 can be used to perform all operations except for the transceiving operation performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, such as S801 and S803, and/or to support the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 1620 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, such as S802, S804, S805, S807, S810, and S811, and/or to support the operations described herein. Other processes of technology.
  • the processing module 1610 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S901 and S903, and/or to support the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver module 1620 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S902, S904, S905, S906, S908, S911, S914, and S915, and/or for supporting Other processes of the technique described in this article.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be a functional module that can complete both sending operations and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1620 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 All sending operations and receiving operations performed by the access network device, for example, when performing a sending operation, the transceiver module 1620 can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 1620 can be considered as a receiving module; or,
  • the transceiver module 1620 can also be a collective term for two functional modules, which are a sending module and a receiving module, respectively.
  • the sending module is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module can be used to execute the embodiment or diagram shown in FIG.
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation, for example, the receiving module can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 All receiving operations performed by the access network equipment.
  • the processing module 1610 is configured to determine that the terminal device enters the RRC connection state as the first user identity, where the terminal device supports the first user identity and the second user identity;
  • the transceiver module 1620 is configured to send a first message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the first message is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity share a first configuration, and the first user identity A configuration includes physical layer configuration and/or measurement configuration.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to receive a second message from the terminal device of the first user identity, where the second message includes the identity of the second user identity, and To indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the second message further includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used by the first user identity to request sharing of the configuration used for using the second user identity.
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to send a third message to the terminal device of the first user identity or the second user identity, and the third message is used to modify the The first configuration.
  • the processing module 1610 is further configured to determine that the terminal device changes a serving cell to a second cell with the identity of the first user or the identity of the second user;
  • the transceiver module 1620 is further configured to send second indication information to the first access network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device.
  • the first access network device is the access network device to which the second cell belongs.
  • processing module 1610 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components
  • transceiver module 1620 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1700.
  • the communication apparatus 1700 is, for example, an access network device 1700.
  • the access network device 1700 may be a communication device, such as a terminal device, or may also be a chip system or the like.
  • the access network device 1700 includes a processor 1710.
  • a memory 1720 may also be included.
  • a transceiver 1730 may also be included.
  • the memory 1720 stores computer instructions or programs, and the processor 1710 can execute the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1720.
  • the processor 1710 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1720 are executed, the processor 1710 is used to perform the operations performed by the processing module 1610 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 1730 is used to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 1620 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the access network device 1700 may not include the memory 1720.
  • the memory is located outside the access network device 1700.
  • the processor 1710 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the external memory are executed, the processor 1710 is used to execute the processing in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the operation performed by the module 1610, and the transceiver 1730 is used to perform the operation performed by the transceiver module 1620 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 1730 may be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver 1730 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 All sending and receiving operations performed by the access network device.
  • the transceiver 1730 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a transmitter, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver 1730 can be considered as a receiver; or
  • the transmitter 1730 can also be a collective term for two functional units, which are a transmitter and a receiver respectively, and the transmitter is used to complete the transmission operation.
  • the transmitter can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the receiver is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiver can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. All receiving operations performed by the network equipment.
  • the transceiver 1730 can also be implemented through a communication interface of the chip system, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiving component in a communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiving component.
  • the communication interface can be a functional unit that can complete both the sending operation and the receiving operation.
  • the communication interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. All sending operations and receiving operations performed, for example, when performing a sending operation, the communication interface can be considered as a sending interface, and when performing a receiving operation, the communication interface can be considered as a receiving interface; or, the communication interface can also be two A general term for functional units.
  • the sending interface is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. All the sending operations performed by the terminal device, and the receiving interface is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving interface can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or all the receiving performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 operating.
  • the access network device 1600 or the access network device 1700 can implement the function of the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the operations and/or functions of each module in the network device 1600 or the access network device 1700 are to implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. Go into details.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 1800 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 1800 is, for example, an access network device 1800.
  • the access network device 1800 includes a processing module 1810.
  • a transceiver module 1820 may also be included.
  • the access network device 1800 may be an access network device, or may be a chip applied to the access network device or other combination devices, components, etc. having the functions of the access network device described above.
  • the transceiver module 1820 may be a transceiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit
  • the processing module 1810 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 1820 may be a radio frequency unit, and the processing module 1810 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 1820 may be an input/output interface of a chip system (such as a baseband chip), and the processing module may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 1810 can be used to perform all operations except for receiving and sending operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S1002, S1006, and S1008, and/or for supporting the descriptions described herein. Other processes of the technology.
  • the transceiver module 1820 can be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S1001, S1003, S1005, S1007, and S1009, and/or for supporting the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the processing module 1810 may be used to perform all operations other than the transceiving operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S1002, S1006, S1008, and S1010, and/or to support this document. Other processes of the described technique.
  • the transceiving module 1820 can be used to perform all the transceiving operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S1101, S1103, S1105, S1107, S1109, and S1111, and/or for supporting the described herein Other processes of technology.
  • the transceiver module 1820 may be a functional module that can perform both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 1820 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All sending operations and receiving operations performed by the access network device, for example, when performing a sending operation, the transceiver module 1820 can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 1820 can be considered as a receiving module; or,
  • the transceiver module 1820 can also be a collective term for two functional modules.
  • the two functional modules are a sending module and a receiving module.
  • the sending module is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module can be used to execute the embodiment or diagram shown in FIG.
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All receiving operations performed by the access network equipment.
  • the transceiver module 1820 is configured to receive a first message from a terminal device with a first user identity, the first message carries a second identity, and the second identity is an identity corresponding to the second user identity, and the terminal The device supports the first user identity and the second user identity, the terminal device is in the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the second user identity, and is in the RRC connected state as the first user identity;
  • a processing module 1810 configured to determine that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the terminal device according to the second identity
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to send the second identifier to a network device, where the second identifier is used to indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity resides in a cell under the access network device.
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to receive a paging message from the network device, where the paging message includes the second identifier;
  • the processing module 1810 is further configured to determine, according to the second identifier, that the cell where the terminal device of the second user identity currently resides is the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located;
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to send the paging message only in the serving cell where the terminal device of the first user identity is located.
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to receive a paging message from the network device, where the paging message includes the second identifier;
  • the processing module 1810 is further configured to determine the context information of the terminal device of the first user identity according to the second identifier;
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the RRC message is used to instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state, or to instruct the A paging message arrives at the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to receive an N2 message from the network device for the first user identity, where the N2 message is used to indicate that the terminal device of the second user identity enters the RRC connection state, or instruct the The terminal device of the second user identity has paged arrival;
  • the transceiver module 1820 is further configured to send an RRC message to the terminal device of the first user identity, where the RRC message is used to instruct the terminal device of the second user identity to enter the RRC connected state, or to instruct the The terminal device of the second user identity has been paged.
  • the network device is the serving core network device of the terminal device of the first user identity
  • the network device is an access network device that stores the context of the terminal device of the second user identity.
  • processing module 1810 in the embodiment of the present application may be implemented by a processor or a processor-related circuit component
  • transceiver module 1820 may be implemented by a transceiver or a transceiver-related circuit component.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 1900.
  • the communication apparatus 1700 is, for example, an access network device 1900.
  • the access network device 1900 may be a communication device, such as a terminal device, or may also be a chip system or the like.
  • the access network device 1900 includes a processor 1910.
  • a memory 1920 may also be included.
  • a transceiver 1930 may also be included.
  • the memory 1920 stores computer instructions or programs, and the processor 1910 can execute the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1920.
  • the processor 1910 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 1920 are executed, the processor 1910 is configured to execute the operations performed by the processing module 1810 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 1930 is configured to execute the operations performed by the transceiver module 1820 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the access network device 1900 may not include the memory 1920.
  • the memory is located outside the access network device 1900.
  • the processor 1910 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the external memory are executed, the processor 1910 is used to execute the processing in the foregoing embodiments.
  • the operation performed by the module 1810, the transceiver 1930 is configured to perform the operation performed by the transceiver module 1820 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 1930 may be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver 1930 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All sending and receiving operations performed by the access network device.
  • the transceiver 1930 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a transmitter, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver 1930 can be considered as a receiver; or
  • the transmitter 1930 may also be a collective name for two functional units.
  • the two functional units are respectively a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transmitter is used to complete the transmission operation.
  • the transmitter may be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the receiver for all the sending operations performed by the access network device, the receiver is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiver can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. All receiving operations performed by the network equipment.
  • the transceiver 1930 can also be implemented through a communication interface of the chip system, and the communication interface is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in the communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component.
  • the communication interface can be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the communication interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All sending operations and receiving operations performed, for example, when performing a sending operation, the communication interface can be considered as a sending interface, and when performing a receiving operation, the communication interface can be considered as a receiving interface; or, the communication interface can also be two A general term for functional units.
  • the sending interface is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. All sending operations performed by the terminal device, and the receiving interface is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving interface can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or all the reception performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 operating.
  • the access network device 1800 or the access network device 1900 can implement the function of the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 or the access network device, and access The operations and/or functions of each module in the network device 1800 or the access network device 1900 are to implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. Go into details.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device 2000 according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the communication device 2000 is, for example, a terminal device 2000.
  • the terminal device 2000 includes a processing module 2010.
  • the transceiver module 2020 may also be included.
  • the terminal device 2000 may be a terminal device, or a chip applied in the terminal device, or other combination devices, components, etc. having the above-mentioned terminal device functions.
  • the transceiver module 2020 may be a transceiver, which may include an antenna and a radio frequency circuit
  • the processing module 2010 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor, and the baseband processor may include one or more CPUs.
  • the transceiver module 2020 may be a radio frequency unit
  • the processing module 2010 may be a processor, such as a baseband processor.
  • the transceiver module 2020 may be an input and output interface of the chip system (for example, a baseband chip), and the processing module may be a processor of the chip system, and may include one or more central processing units.
  • the processing module 2010 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 except for receiving and sending operations, for example, entering the RRC connection from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user. State, and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 2020 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S1001, S1007, and S1009, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein.
  • the processing module 2010 may be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 except for the transceiving operation, for example, entering the RRC connection from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user. State, and/or other processes used to support the techniques described herein.
  • the transceiver module 2020 may be used to perform all the transceiver operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S1101, S1107, S1109, and S1111, and/or other processes for supporting the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver module 2020 can be a functional module that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver module 2020 can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All sending and receiving operations performed by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver module 2020 can be considered as a sending module, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver module 2020 can be considered as a receiving module; or, the transceiver module 2020 It can also be a collective term for two functional modules.
  • the two functional modules are the sending module and the receiving module.
  • the sending module is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending module can be used to execute the embodiment shown in Figure 10 or the embodiment shown in Figure 11.
  • the receiving module is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving module can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All receive operations.
  • the terminal device 2000 supports the first user identity and the second user identity,
  • the processing module 2010 is configured to enter the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state with the identity of the first user;
  • the transceiver module 2020 is configured to send a first message to the access network device with the identity of the first user, the first message carrying a second identity, and the second identity is an identity of the second user identity, and the The second identifier is used to indicate that the first user identity and the second user identity belong to the same terminal device 2000, where the terminal device 2000 is in an RRC idle state or an RRC inactive state as the second user identity;
  • the transceiver module 2020 is further configured to receive an RRC message from the access network device with the identity of the first user, where the RRC message is used to indicate that the terminal device 2000 with the identity of the second user has a paging arrival, or to indicate The terminal device 2000 of the second user identity enters the RRC connected state;
  • the processing module 2010 is further configured to enter the RRC connected state as the second user.
  • the second identity is the S-TMSI of the second user identity
  • the second identity is the I-RNTI of the second user identity.
  • processing module 2010 in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by a processor or processor-related circuit components
  • transceiver module 2020 may be implemented by a transceiver or transceiver-related circuit components.
  • an embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device 2100.
  • the communication device 2100 is a terminal device 2100, for example.
  • the terminal device 2100 may be a communication device, such as a terminal device, or may also be a chip system or the like.
  • the terminal device 2100 includes a processor 2110.
  • a memory 2120 may also be included.
  • a transceiver 2130 may also be included.
  • the memory 2120 stores computer instructions or programs, and the processor 2110 can execute the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 2120.
  • the processor 2110 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the memory 2120 are executed, the processor 2110 is configured to execute the operations performed by the processing module 2010 in the foregoing embodiment, and the transceiver 2130 is configured to execute the operations performed by the transceiver module 2020 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal device 2100 may not include the memory 2120.
  • the memory is located outside the terminal device 2100.
  • the processor 2110 When the computer instructions or programs stored in the external memory are executed, the processor 2110 is used to execute the processing performed by the processing module 2010 in the foregoing embodiment. Operation, the transceiver 2130 is used to perform the operations performed by the transceiver module 2020 in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the transceiver 2130 may be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the transceiver 2130 may be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 All sending and receiving operations performed by the terminal device.
  • the transceiver 2130 when performing a sending operation, can be considered as a transmitter, and when performing a receiving operation, the transceiver 2130 can be considered as a receiver; or, the transceiver 2130.
  • It can also be a collective term for two functional units. These two functional units are respectively a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transmitter is used to complete the transmission operation.
  • the transmitter can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11
  • the receiver is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiver can be used to perform the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or all the terminal devices performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 Receive operation.
  • the transceiver 2130 can also be implemented through a communication interface of the chip system, which is connected to a radio frequency transceiver component in a communication device to implement information transmission and reception through the radio frequency transceiver component.
  • the communication interface can be a functional unit that can complete both sending and receiving operations.
  • the communication interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11
  • the communication interface can be considered as a sending interface
  • the communication interface can be considered as a receiving interface
  • the communication interface can also be two functional units The two functional units are the sending interface and the receiving interface respectively.
  • the sending interface is used to complete the sending operation.
  • the sending interface can be used to execute the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the receiving interface is used to complete the receiving operation.
  • the receiving interface can be used to perform all the receiving operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11.
  • terminal device 2000 or the terminal device 2100 can realize the functions of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, and the terminal device 2000 or the terminal device 2100 in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the operation and/or function of each module is to implement the corresponding process in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, and is not repeated here for brevity.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, and the communication device may be a terminal device or a circuit.
  • the communication device may be used to perform the actions performed by the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • FIG. 22 shows a simplified schematic diagram of the structure of the terminal device. It is easy to understand and easy to illustrate.
  • the terminal device uses a mobile phone as an example.
  • the terminal equipment includes a processor, a memory, a radio frequency circuit, an antenna, and an input and output device.
  • the processor is mainly used to process the communication protocol and communication data, and to control the terminal device, execute the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the memory is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the radio frequency circuit is mainly used for the conversion of baseband signal and radio frequency signal and the processing of radio frequency signal.
  • the antenna is mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices such as touch screens, display screens, keyboards, etc., are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users. It should be noted that some types of terminal devices may not have input and output devices.
  • the processor When data needs to be sent, the processor performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit.
  • the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal and sends the radio frequency signal to the outside in the form of electromagnetic waves through the antenna.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor, and the processor converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data.
  • FIG. 22 only one memory and processor are shown in FIG. 22. In an actual terminal device product, there may be one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the memory may also be referred to as a storage medium or storage device.
  • the memory may be set independently of the processor, or may be integrated with the processor, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna and radio frequency circuit with the transceiving function can be regarded as the transceiving unit of the terminal device
  • the processor with the processing function can be regarded as the processing unit of the terminal device.
  • the terminal device includes a transceiver unit 2210 and a processing unit 2220.
  • the transceiving unit may also be referred to as a transceiver, a transceiver, a transceiving device, and so on.
  • the processing unit may also be called a processor, a processing board, a processing module, a processing device, and so on.
  • the device for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver unit 2210 can be regarded as the receiving unit, and the device for implementing the sending function in the transceiver unit 2210 as the sending unit, that is, the transceiver unit 2210 includes a receiving unit and a sending unit.
  • the transceiver unit may sometimes be called a transceiver, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit.
  • the receiving unit may sometimes be called a receiver, a receiver, or a receiving circuit.
  • the transmitting unit may sometimes be called a transmitter, a transmitter, or a transmitting circuit.
  • transceiving unit 2210 is used to perform the sending and receiving operations on the terminal device side in the foregoing method embodiment, and the processing unit 2220 is used to perform other operations on the terminal device in the foregoing method embodiment except for the transceiving operation.
  • the transceiver unit 2210 is used to perform all the sending operations and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, such as S402 and S403, and/or the transceiver unit 2210 is also used to perform support for this text.
  • the processing unit 2220 is used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S401, S404, and S405, and/or the processing unit 2220 is also used to perform the support described herein. Other processes of the described technology.
  • the transceiver unit 2210 is used to perform all the sending operations and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, such as S501 and S502, and/or the transceiver unit 2210 is also used to perform support Other processes of the technique described in this article.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 except for the receiving and sending operations, such as S503 to S505, and/or the processing unit 2220 is also configured to perform the support described herein Other processes of technology.
  • the transceiving unit 2210 is used to perform all the sending and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, such as S601, and/or the transceiving unit 2210 is also used to perform the support described herein. Other processes of the described technology.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 except for receiving and sending operations, such as S602 to S604, and/or the processing unit 2220 is also configured to perform the support described herein Other processes of technology.
  • the transceiving unit 2210 is used to perform all the sending and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, such as S701, and/or the transceiving unit 2210 is also used to perform the support described in this document. Other processes of the described technology.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 except for the transceiving operation, such as S702, and/or the processing unit 2220 is also configured to perform support for the technology described herein Other processes.
  • the transceiver unit 2210 is configured to perform all the sending and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, such as S802, S804, S805, S807, S810, and S811, and/or The transceiver unit 2210 is also used to perform other processes that support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations except for the receiving and sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, such as S801, S803, S806, S808, and S809, and/or the processing unit 2220 is also used to Perform other processes that support the technology described in this article.
  • the transceiver unit 2210 is configured to perform all the sending and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S902, S904, S905, S906, S908, S911, S914, and S915. , And/or the transceiver unit 2210 is also used to perform other processes that support the technology described herein.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations except for the receiving and sending operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as S901, S903, S907, S909, S910, S912, and S913, and/or the processing unit 2220 is also used to perform other processes that support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiving unit 2210 is used to perform all the sending and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, such as S1001, S1007, and S1009, and/or the transceiving unit 2210 is also used to Perform other processes that support the technology described in this article.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 except for receiving and sending operations, for example, entering the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, And/or the processing unit 2220 is also used to perform other processes that support the technology described herein.
  • the transceiver unit 2210 is configured to perform all the sending operations and receiving operations of the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, such as S1101, S1107, S1109, and S1111, and/or the transceiver unit 2210 also Used to perform other processes that support the technology described in this article.
  • the processing unit 2220 is configured to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 except for the receiving and sending operations, for example, entering the RRC connected state from the RRC idle state or the RRC inactive state as the first user, And/or the processing unit 2220 is also used to perform other processes that support the technology described herein.
  • the device may include a transceiver unit and a processing unit.
  • the transceiving unit may be an input/output circuit and/or a communication interface;
  • the processing unit is an integrated processor or a microprocessor or an integrated circuit.
  • the device shown in FIG. 23 can be referred to.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processor 1310 in FIG. 13.
  • the device can perform functions similar to the processor 1510 in FIG. 15.
  • the device may perform functions similar to the processor 2110 in FIG. 21.
  • the device includes a processor 2310, a data sending processor 2320, and a data receiving processor 2330.
  • the processing module 1210 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 2310 in FIG. 23 and complete corresponding functions; the transceiver module 1220 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 2320 in FIG. 23, and/or receiving data The processor 2330.
  • the processing module 1410 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 2310 in FIG. 23 and perform corresponding functions; the transceiver module 1420 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 2320 in FIG. 23, and/or Receive data processor 2330.
  • the processing module 2010 in the foregoing embodiment may be the processor 2310 in FIG. 23 and complete corresponding functions; the transceiver module 2020 in the foregoing embodiment may be the sending data processor 2320 in FIG. 23, and/or Receive data processor 2330.
  • the channel encoder and the channel decoder are shown in FIG. 23, it can be understood that these modules do not constitute a restrictive description of this embodiment, and are only illustrative.
  • Fig. 24 shows another form of this embodiment.
  • the processing device 2400 includes modules such as a modulation subsystem, a central processing subsystem, and a peripheral subsystem.
  • the communication device in this embodiment can be used as the modulation subsystem therein.
  • the modulation subsystem may include a processor 2403 and an interface 2404.
  • the processor 2403 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 1210
  • the interface 2404 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 1220.
  • the processor 2403 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 1410
  • the interface 2404 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 1420.
  • the processor 2403 completes the function of the aforementioned processing module 2010, and the interface 2404 completes the function of the aforementioned transceiver module 2020.
  • the modulation subsystem includes a memory 2406, a processor 2403, and a program stored in the memory 2406 and running on the processor. The processor 2403 executes the program on the terminal device side in the above method embodiment. Methods. It should be noted that the memory 2406 can be non-volatile or volatile, and its location can be located inside the modulation subsystem or in the processing device 2400, as long as the memory 2406 can be connected to the The processor 2403 is sufficient.
  • the device 2500 includes one or more radio frequency units, such as a remote radio unit (RRU) 2510 and one or more baseband units (BBU) (also referred to as digital units, digital units, DU) 2520 .
  • RRU remote radio unit
  • BBU baseband units
  • the RRU 2510 may be referred to as a transceiver module, which corresponds to the transceiver module 1610 in FIG. 16, or the RRU 2510 may correspond to the transceiver module 1810 in FIG. 18.
  • the transceiver module may also be called a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and it may include at least one antenna 2511 and a radio frequency unit 2512.
  • the RRU 2510 part is mainly used for receiving and sending of radio frequency signals and conversion of radio frequency signals and baseband signals, for example, for sending instruction information to terminal equipment.
  • the 2510 part of the BBU is mainly used to perform baseband processing, control the base station, and so on.
  • the RRU 2510 and the BBU 2520 may be physically set together, or may be physically separated, that is, a distributed base station.
  • the BBU 2520 is the control center of the base station, and can also be called a processing module. It can correspond to the processing module 1620 in FIG. 16, or it can correspond to the processing module 1820 in FIG. 18. It is mainly used to complete baseband processing functions, such as channel Encoding, multiplexing, modulation, spread spectrum, etc.
  • the BBU processing module
  • the BBU may be used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment, for example, to generate the foregoing indication information.
  • the BBU 2520 may be composed of one or more single boards, and multiple single boards may jointly support a radio access network with a single access standard (such as an LTE network), or support different access standards. Wireless access network (such as LTE network, 5G network or other networks).
  • the BBU 2520 also includes a memory 2521 and a processor 2522.
  • the memory 2521 is used to store necessary instructions and data.
  • the processor 2522 is used to control the base station to perform necessary actions, for example, used to control the base station to execute the operation procedure of the network device in the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the memory 2521 and the processor 2522 may serve one or more single boards. In other words, the memory and the processor can be set separately on each board. It can also be that multiple boards share the same memory and processor. In addition, necessary circuits can be provided on each board.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a first communication system.
  • the communication system may include at least one terminal device involved in any one of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the communication device 1200 in FIG. 12 or the communication device 1300 in FIG. 13.
  • the terminal device can be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 to the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, for example: S401 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 ⁇ S405, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein; or, S501 ⁇ S505 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein; or, S601 to S604 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein; or, S701 to S702 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 and/or used to support this article Other processes of the described technique.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a second communication system.
  • the communication system may include at least one terminal device involved in any one of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and at least one of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or The access network device involved in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 9.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the communication device 1400 in FIG. 14 or the communication device 1500 in FIG. 15, and the access network device is, for example, the communication device 1600 in FIG. 16 or the communication device 1700 in FIG. 17.
  • the terminal device can be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, such as: S801 to S811 in the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the access network device can be used to perform all operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, for example: S801 to S805, S807 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 , S810 and S811, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein; or, S901 ⁇ S906, S908, S911, S914, and S915 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 and/or used to support this article Other processes of the described technique.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a third communication system.
  • the communication system may include at least one terminal device involved in any one of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, and at least one of the above-mentioned embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or The access network device involved in any one of the embodiments shown in FIG. 11.
  • the terminal device is, for example, the communication device 2000 in FIG. 20 or the communication device 2100 in FIG. 21, and the access network device is, for example, the communication device 1800 in FIG. 18 or the communication device 1900 in FIG. 19.
  • the terminal device can be used to perform all operations performed by the terminal device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the access network device can be used to perform all operations performed by the access network device in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 or the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, for example: S1001 to S1003 and S1005 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 ⁇ S1009, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein; or, S1101 ⁇ S1103 and S1005 ⁇ S1011 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, and/or other processes used to support the technology described herein process.
  • the above three communication systems may be the same communication system, or may also be different communication systems. Or, it is also possible that any two of the communication systems are the same communication system, and the other communication system is a different communication system.
  • the above-mentioned first communication system and the second communication system are the same communication system
  • the third communication system is a different communication system
  • the second communication system and the third communication system are the same communication system
  • the first communication system The system is a different communication system, and so on.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 4 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium is used to store a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 4 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 5 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 6 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, and the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 7 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 8 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the terminal device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 9 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 10 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 11 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the terminal device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 8 provided by the foregoing method embodiment.
  • the process related to the access network device in the embodiment is not limited to a computer-readable storage medium.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 9 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the access network device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 10 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the access network device in the embodiment.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program.
  • the computer program When the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the method shown in FIG. 11 provided by the foregoing method embodiment. The process related to the access network device in the embodiment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 7 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to terminal equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 8 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to access network equipment.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 9 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to access network equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 10 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to access network equipment.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product is used to store a computer program, when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer can implement the embodiment shown in FIG. 11 provided by the above method embodiment Processes related to access network equipment.
  • processors mentioned in the embodiments of this application may be a CPU, or other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), ready-made Field programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), and electrically available Erase programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • the volatile memory may be random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • dynamic RAM dynamic RAM
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • synchronous dynamic random access memory synchronous DRAM, SDRAM
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • synchronous connection dynamic random access memory serial DRAM, SLDRAM
  • direct rambus RAM direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the processor is a general-purpose processor, DSP, ASIC, FPGA or other programmable logic device, discrete gate or transistor logic device, or discrete hardware component
  • the memory storage module
  • the size of the sequence number of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not correspond to the embodiments of this application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative, for example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or It can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请涉及一种通信方法、装置及设备。终端设备以第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以第二用户身份驻留在第一小区。确定更换服务小区到第二小区。以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区。终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，例如在更换服务小区时，两个用户身份不必分别进行小区更换，而是由终端设备进行一次小区更换过程，确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可。减少了需要执行的小区更换的过程，从而减小了终端设备的功耗。

Description

一种通信方法、装置及设备 技术领域
本申请涉及移动通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种通信方法、装置及设备。
背景技术
随着通信技术的发展，很多终端设备(如手机)都具备支持多个用户身份模块(subscriber identification module，SIM)卡的功能。以终端设备支持两个SIM卡为例，有多种可能的实现方式，例如双卡单待(dual SIM single standby，DSSS)模式、双卡双待(dual SIM dual standby，DSDS)模式、或双卡双激活(dual SIM dual active，DSDA)模式。
其中，DSSS表示终端设备中虽然有两个SIM卡，但同一时间只能驻留在一个SIM卡所属的通信***中，在不同时间可以通过用户选择驻留在不同SIM卡所属的通信***中。DSDS表示终端设备可以同时驻留在两个SIM所属的通信***中，但同时只能有一个SIM卡所属的通信***处于通信状态，例如使用一个SIM卡上网时，不能使用另一个SIM接听电话。DSDA表示终端设备不仅可以同时驻留在多SIM卡所属的通信***中，而且可以同时在多个SIM卡所属的通信***中进行通信，例如使用一个SIM卡上网时，还可以使用另一个SIM卡接听电话。
以终端设备支持两个SIM卡为例，两个SIM卡可能同属于一个运营商。但两个SIM卡依然需要各自独立进行小区选择或重选等过程，对于终端设备来说功耗较大。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法、装置及设备，用于减小终端设备的功耗。
第一方面，提供第一种通信方法，该方法可以适用于终端设备，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，该方法包括：以所述第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以所述第二用户身份驻留在所述第一小区；确定更换服务小区到第二小区；以所述第一用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
该方法可由第一通信装置执行，第一通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片***。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为终端装置。示例性地，所述终端装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片***，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，例如第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，在更换小区时，两个用户身份可以均更换服务小区，且继续更换到同一小区，那么两个用户身份不必分别为确定小区更换(例如，小区重选、小区选择或小区切换等)进行测量或判决等操作，而是由终端设备进行一次相应的测量或判决等操作，确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可，或者由其 中一个用户身份进行一次相应的测量或判决等操作以确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可。减少了需要执行的小区更换的过程，从而减小了终端设备的功耗。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
通过小区选择过程或小区重选过程，确定驻留到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
当空闲态或RRC非激活态的终端设备驻留在一个小区后，随着该终端设备的移动，该终端设备可能需要更换到另一个更高优先级或更好信号的小区驻留，这就是小区重选过程。当空闲或RRC非激活态的终端设备驻留在一个小区后，随着该终端设备的移动，该终端设备的服务小区可能会不可用，或不适合继续驻留，则该终端设备需要更换到合适的小区进行驻留，这就是小区选择过程。小区选择是尽快找到一个合适小区的过程，小区重选是选择更适合的小区的过程。本申请实施例中，如果终端设备是以第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，那么这里的更换服务小区，可以是指通过小区重选过程确定重选到第二小区，或者是指通过小区选择过程确定选择到第二小区，具体的不做限制。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述小区重选过程是根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行的，所述第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息是根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和/或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息来确定的；其中，
所述第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息；
所述第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
例如，接入网设备可能只向终端设备发送一套配置信息，那么终端设备就只会接收一套配置信息。例如接入网设备只向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备只以第一用户身份接收第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不会以第二用户身份接收第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备可以根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，接入网设备只向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备只以第二用户身份接收第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不会以第一用户身份接收第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备可以根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
或者，接入网设备向终端设备发送两套配置信息，则终端设备可以接收两套配置信息。例如，接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，以及向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份接收第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，以及以第二用户身份接收第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息。则，终端设备可以根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者，根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第 三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者，根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。例如，终端设备可以随机选择根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，第一用户身份对应的SIM卡和第二用户身份对应的SIM卡，有一个是主卡，另一个是副卡，则终端设备可以选择主卡对应的专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者选择副卡对应的专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
终端设备在进行小区重选时，可以根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行，从而可以尽量驻留到优先级较高的小区。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，通过小区选择过程，确定驻留到第二小区，包括：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区选择，并确定选择到所述第二小区。
例如，终端设备可以不以任何一个用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区，也就是说，终端设备可以直接进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区。或者，终端设备也可以以第一用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区，或者，终端设备也可以以第二用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区。终端设备可以只执行一次小区选择过程，无需以不同的用户身份分别执行小区选择过程，减少了需要执行的小区选择过程，有助于减小终端设备的功耗。或者，终端设备也可以以第一用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区。终端设备可以以两个用户身份来执行小区选择过程，可以使得选择的结果(第二小区)更为准确。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，通过小区重选过程，确定驻留到第二小区，包括：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区重选，并确定重选到所述第二小区。
例如，终端设备可以不以任何一个用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第一小区，也就是说，终端设备可以直接进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区；或者，终端设备也可以以第一用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区；或者，终端设备也可以以第二用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区。终端设备可以只执行一次小区重选过程，无需以不同的用户身份分别执行小区重选过程，减少了需要执行的小区重选过程，有助于减小终端设备的功耗。或者，终端设备也可以以第一用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区。终端设备可以以两个用户身份来执行小区重选过程，可以使得重选的结果(第二小区)更为准确。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态、RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
如果终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，那么对于第一用户身份来说，终端设备可以是确定以第一用户身份切换到第二小区。例如第一消息可以是切换命令，因为终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，因此，接入网设备可以将第一消息发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，而终端设备可以以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。第一消息可以指示以第一用户身份更换小区到第二小区。这里所述的以第一用户身份更换小区到第二小区，可以是指以第一用户身份切换到第二小区。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述方法还包括：
停止以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，或者，不以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
例如，如果终端设备在以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态之前，以第二用户身份在进行小区重选或小区选择，那么在以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态时，终端设备可以停止以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，例如，停止以第二用户身份进行测量，以停止以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。而如果终端设备在以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态之前，并未以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，则在以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态时(或，以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态之后)，终端设备保持不以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。相当于，终端设备不以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，该过程可以发生在终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态之前或之后。终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，因此第二用户身份可以跟随第一用户身份更换服务小区即可，例如在终端设备以第一用户身份确定更换服务小区到第二小区时，终端设备也可以以第二用户身份确定更换到第二小区进行驻留。从而终端设备无需以第二用户身份进行小区选择或重选，减少了终端设备的小区选择或重选的过程，节省终端设备的功耗，而且能够保证第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述方法还包括：
当以所述第二用户身份进入RRC连接态时，以所述第二用户身份与所述第二小区建立连接。
终端设备以第二用户身份驻留到了第二小区，那么如果终端设备要以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份直接与第二小区建立连接，从而可以保证第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态，所述方法还包括：
所述第一消息携带第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示将所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区。
通过这种具体的指示，使得终端设备更明确如何为第一用户身份和第二用户身份更换小区。或者，第一指示信息只是指示更换小区到第二小区，而并不具体指示究竟是第一用户身份更换小区还是第二用户身份更换小区。因为第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此终端设备根据第一指示信息可以明确将第一用户身份和第二用户身份都更换到第二小区。而且，由于终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，也以第二 用户身份处于RRC连接态，因此，接入网设备只需要向终端设备发送一次第一消息，在第一消息中包括第一指示信息，就可以指示终端设备以两个用户身份都更换服务小区，无需接入网设备分别向不同的用户身份发送第一消息，节省信令开销。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二用户身份的标识；和/或，
以所述第二用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第一用户身份的标识；
其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
例如，第一标识和第二标识都可以是C-RNTI。第一标识是第一用户身份的C-RNTI，例如称为C-RNTI 1，第二标识是第二用户身份的C-RNTI，例如称为C-RNTI 2。而C-RNTI是用户身份在进入RRC连接态后终端设备才能获得的，因此，终端设备可以用后一个进入RRC连接态的用户身份向网络设备发送第二指示信息。例如，第一用户身份先进入RRC连接态，第二用户身份后进入RRC连接态，则终端设备在第一用户身份进入RRC连接态后可以获得C-RNTI 1，在第二用户身份进入RRC连接态后可以获得C-RNTI 2，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份向网络设备发送第二指示信息。接入网设备接收第二指示信息后，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，从而也可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
向所述核心网设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
其中，每个用户身份都可以对应一个PLMN的ID，第一用户身份和第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同，可以理解为，第一用户身份对应的PLMN的ID和第二用户身份对应的PLMN的ID是相同的。终端设备例如可以以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，例如在终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络时，可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。或者终端设备也可以通过其他消息将第三指示信息发送给核心网设备。或者，终端设备可以以以第二用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，例如在终端设备以第二用户身份注册到网络时，可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。或者终端设备也可以通过其他消息将第三指示信息发送给核心网设备。终端设备以任意一个用户身份将第三指示信息发送给核心网设备即可，无需通过两个用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，可以减少信令开销。
或者，终端设备既以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，也以第二用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息。例如，在终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络时，可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。另外，在终端设备以第二用户身份注册到网络时，也可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。终端设备通过两个用户身份均向核心网设备发送第一指示信息，可以起到验证的作用，例如，核心网设备只有在接收了终端设备通过两个用户身份发来的第三指示信息，才确认该第三指示信息的指示为“真”，或者说，确定第三指示信息是可靠的，而如果核心网设备只接收了终端设备通过一个用户身份发来的第三指示信息，并未接收终端设备通过另一个用户身份发来的指示信息，则核心网设备认为第三 指示信息不可靠，可能并不会按照第一指示信息的指示来调度终端设备。通过这种方式，可以提升信息传输的可靠性。
结合第一方面，在第一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述核心网设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
对于一个终端设备来说，属于同一个运营商的两个用户身份是否总是具有相同的服务小区，可以由核心网设备来配置，或者也可以通过协议规定等，这里以核心网设备配置为例。
例如核心网设备配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，则核心网设备可以向终端设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，终端设备接收第四指示信息，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区；或者，如果核心网设备并不配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，即，核心网设备并不限制第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区，第一用户身份的服务小区和第二用户身份的服务小区可以相同也可以不同，在这种情况下，核心网设备可以不向终端设备发送第四指示信息，终端设备未接收来自核心网设备的第四指示信息，就可以确定对第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不限制。在这种情况下，对于第四指示信息的取值不做限制。而且核心网设备如果确定不限制第一用户身份的服务小区和第二用户身份的服务小区相同，则可以不向终端设备发送第四指示信息，有助于节省信令开销。
或者，例如核心网设备配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，则核心网设备可以向终端设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，终端设备接收第四指示信息，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区；或者，如果核心网设备并不配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，即，核心网设备并不限制第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区，第一用户身份的服务小区和第二用户身份的服务小区可以相同也可以不同，在这种情况下，核心网设备也可以向终端设备发送第四指示信息，此时第四指示信息可以指示对第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不限制，终端设备接收第四指示信息，就可以确定对第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不限制。在这种情况下，第四指示信息可以通过不同的取值来指示不同的内容。终端设备总是会接收第四指示信息，可以根据第四指示信息确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份是否总是具有相同的服务小区，指示较为明确。
第二方面，提供第二种通信方法，该方法可以适用于终端设备，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，该方法包括：以所述第一用户身份从第一小区进入RRC连接态；以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置；以所述第一用户身份根据所述第一配置收发数据或者执行测量，所述第一配置为所述第二用户身份使用的配置；其中，以所述第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。
该方法可由第二通信装置执行，第二通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片***。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为终端装置。示例性地，所述终端装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备 的功能的芯片***，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。
在本申请实施例中，不同的用户身份可以共享同一套配置，从而接入网设备对一个终端设备只需配置一次即可，减少了接入网设备的配置过程。而且由于不同的用户身份可以共享同一套配置，则接入网设备也只需向终端设备发送一次第一配置即可，无需对不同的用户身份分别发送第一配置，节省信令开销。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
第二标识例如为第二用户身份的C-RNTI。接入网设备接收的是来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息，而第二消息又包括第二标识，从而接入网设备就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。进一步的，接入网设备也可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，从而接入网设备可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以共享同一套配置。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
例如，接入网设备根据第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，从而接入网设备可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以共享同一套配置。或者，接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息后，可以根据第一指示信息确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以使用相同的配置。例如，第一指示信息用于第一用户身份请求与第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层，其中，共享物理层，可以理解为，共享物理层配置。
结合第二方面，在第二方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述接入网设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置；
基于所述第三消息修改所述第一配置，以及，以所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据或者执行测量。
例如，接入网设备可以对第一配置进行修改，例如接入网设备修改了第一配置中的全部参数的取值或部分参数的取值。则接入网设备需要将修改信息发送给终端设备，以便终端设备能够修改第一配置。例如，接入网设备可以向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息；或者，接入网设备可以向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息。即，接入网设备只需向终端设备发送一次第三消息即可，无需分别向不同的用户身份发送第三消息，节省信令开销。而且不同的用户身份对应的是同一套配置，接入网设备只需针对一套配置(第一配置)进行修改，无需对不同的用户身份对应的配置分别进行修改，减少了接入网设备的工作量。
第三方面，提供第三种通信方法，该方法包括：确定终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态，其中，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和第二用户身份；向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置。
该方法可由第三通信装置执行，第三通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实 现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片***。示例性地，所述通信设备为接入网设备。示例性地，所述通信装置为设置在接入网设备中的用于实现接入网设备的功能的芯片***，或者为用于实现接入网设备的功能的其他部件。
例如，接入网设备事先知晓第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，且确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。那么，接入网设备在发现终端设备先是以第二用户身份进入了RRC连接态，之后又以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态后，就可以向终端设备发送第一消息，指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层，或者，指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
第二标识例如为第二用户身份的C-RNTI。接入网设备接收的是来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息，而第二消息又包括第二标识，从而接入网设备就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。进一步的，接入网设备也可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，从而接入网设备可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以共享同一套配置。例如，接入网设备接收第二消息，该步骤可以发生在接入网设备向终端设备发送第一消息之前。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
例如，接入网设备根据第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，从而接入网设备可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以共享同一套配置。或者，接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息后，可以根据第一指示信息确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以使用相同的配置。例如，第一指示信息用于第一用户身份请求与第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层，其中，共享物理层，可以理解为，共享物理层配置。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
向所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置。
例如，接入网设备可以对第一配置进行修改，例如接入网设备修改了第一配置中的全部参数的取值或部分参数的取值。则接入网设备需要将修改信息发送给终端设备，以便终端设备能够修改第一配置。例如，接入网设备可以向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息；或者，接入网设备可以向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息。即，接入网设备只需向终端设备发送一次第三消息即可，无需分别向不同的用户身份发送第三消息，节省信令开销。而且不同的用户身份对应的是同一套配置，接入网设备只需针对一套配置(第一配置)进行修改，无需对不同的用户身份对应的配置分别进行修改，减少了接入网设备的工作量。
结合第三方面，在第三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
确定所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小 区；
向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，所述第一接入网设备为所述第二小区所属的接入网设备。
如果接入网设备确定终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，或者，确定终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，或者，确定终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，以及确定终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区(其中，由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此如果要更换服务小区，则两个用户身份都可能会进行更换服务小区的动作，而且会更换到同一个小区。因此，接入网设备只需确定其中一个用户身份要更换服务小区即可，或者接入网设备也可以一并确定两个用户身份都要更换服务小区)，那么，如果第二小区和第一小区都属于该接入网设备，则该接入网设备可以不进行操作，但如果第二小区和第一小区不属于同一个接入网设备，则，该接入网设备可以向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，第一接入网设备为第二小区所属的接入网设备。第一接入网设备接收来自该接入网设备的第二指示信息后，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，也就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。那么，如果第一接入网设备也要向终端设备发送相应的配置，则第一接入网设备也只需向终端设备发送一套配置即可，两个用户身份可以共用这一套配置。
第四方面，提供第四种通信方法，该方法包括：接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为对应于第二用户身份的标识，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份，所述终端设备以第二用户身份处于无线资源控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态；根据所述第二标识确定所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于所述终端设备；将所述第二标识发送给网络设备，所述第二标识用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备驻留在所述接入网设备下的小区。
该方法可由第四通信装置执行，第四通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片***。示例性地，所述通信设备为接入网设备。示例性地，所述通信装置为设置在接入网设备中的用于实现接入网设备的功能的芯片***，或者为用于实现接入网设备的功能的其他部件。
第二接入网设备接收第二标识后，可以确定第二标识对应的接入网设备，从而可以确定第二标识对应的第二用户身份是驻留在该接入网设备下的小区。那么，如果第二标识对应的第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态，网络设备就只需向该接入网设备发送第三消息即可，无需再向其他的接入网设备发送第三消息，这样可以减少第三消息的数量。通过本申请实施例提供的技术方案，网络设备能够较为准确地知道终端设备的用户身份所驻留的接入网设备或所驻留的小区，从而无需向多个接入网设备或多个小区发送第三消息，有助于节省寻呼消息的开销。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
根据所述第二标识，确定所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备当前驻留的小区是所述第 一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区；
只在所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区发送所述寻呼消息。
第三消息携带了第二标识，第二标识例如为第二用户身份的I-RNTI。第一接入网设备例如已经存储了第一用户身份的I-RNTI和第二用户身份的I-RNTI之间的关联关系，那么第一接入网设备通过查询该关联关系，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，从而第一接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区就是第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区。例如第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区为第一小区，则第一接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区也是第一小区。该接入网设备确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区就是第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区，那么，该接入网设备就只需在该服务小区发送寻呼消息即可，无需再在其他的小区发送寻呼消息，这样可以减少寻呼消息的数量，节省传输开销。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
根据所述第二标识，确定所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文信息；
向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达。
例如，第二标识为第二用户身份的I-RNTI，接入网设备根据第二用户身份的I-RNTI，可以查找到第二用户身份的终端设备的上下文信息。因为查找到了第二用户身份的上下文信息，因此接入网设备无需在空口发送寻呼消息，而是可以直接向第二用户身份的终端设备发送RRC消息，从而节省了寻呼消息的开销。而且处于RRC非激活态的第二用户身份无需监听空口的寻呼消息，也使得终端设备更为省电。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述方法还包括：
接收来自所述网络设备的针对第一用户身份的N2消息，所述N2消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达；
向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达。
例如，该N2消息携带第二用户身份的AMF UE NGAP ID和RAN UE NGAP ID，从而接入网设备根据该N2消息就可以确定第二用户身份的上下文信息。因为查找到了第二用户身份的上下文信息，因此接入网设备无需在空口发送寻呼消息，而是可以直接向第二用户身份的终端设备发送RRC消息，从而节省了寻呼消息的开销。而且处于RRC非激活态的第二用户身份无需监听空口的寻呼消息，也使得终端设备更为省电。
结合第四方面，在第四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC空闲态时，所述网络设备是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的服务核心网设备；
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC非激活态时，所述网络设备是存储所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文的接入网设备。
如果终端设备以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态，那么可以由核心网设备对第二用户 身份的终端设备发起寻呼，因此网络设备可以是核心网设备。或者，如果终端设备以第二用户身份处于RRC非激活态，那么可以由接入网设备对第二用户身份的终端设备发起寻呼，因此网络设备可以是接入网设备。
第五方面，提供第五种通信方法，该方法可以适用于终端设备，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，该方法包括：以所述第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态；以所述第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的标识，所述第二标识用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，其中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态；以所述第一用户身份接收来自所述接入网设备的RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态；以所述第二用户身份进入所述RRC连接态。
该方法可由第五通信装置执行，第五通信装置可以是通信设备或能够支持通信设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，例如芯片***。示例性地，所述第五通信装置为终端装置。示例性地，所述终端装置为终端设备，或者为设置在终端设备中的用于实现终端设备的功能的芯片***，或者为用于实现终端设备的功能的其他部件。
通过本申请实施例提供的技术方案，接入网设备或核心网设备能够较为准确地知道终端设备的用户身份所驻留的接入网设备或所驻留的小区，从而无需向多个接入网设备或多个小区发送寻呼消息，有助于节省寻呼消息的开销。而且，接入网设备也可以知道终端设备的用户身份所驻留的小区，从而只需在该小区发送寻呼消息，也可以进一步节省寻呼消息的开销。或者，接入网设备可以无需发送寻呼消息，而是直接向相应的用户身份发送RRC消息，可以在更大程度上节省寻呼消息的开销。同理，核心网设备也可以无需发送寻呼消息，而是直接向相应的用户身份发送RRC消息，可以在更大程度上节省寻呼消息的开销。
结合第五方面，在第五方面的一种可能的实施方式中，当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于所述RRC空闲态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的S-TMSI；当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于所述RRC非激活态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的I-RNTI。
第二用户身份的终端设备所处的状态不同时，第二标识可以随之有所不同。这里只是对第二标识的两种示例，本申请实施例并不限制第二标识可以是其他的标识，只要能够表征第二用户身份即可。
第六方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第一通信装置。所述第一通信装置用于执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第一通信装置可以包括用于执行第一方面或第一方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块。可选的，还可以包括收发模块。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。其中，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
所述处理模块，用于以所述第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以所述第二用户身份驻留在所述第一小区；
所述处理模块，还用于确定更换服务小区到第二小区；
所述处理模块，还用于以所述第一用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区；
其中，所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理模块用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区：
通过小区选择过程或小区重选过程，确定驻留到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于无线资源控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述小区重选过程是根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行的，其中所述第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息是根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和/或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息来确定的，
所述第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息；
所述第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理模块用于通过如下方式通过小区选择过程，确定驻留到第二小区：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区选择，并确定选择到所述第二小区。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理模块用于通过如下方式通过小区重选过程，确定驻留到第二小区：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区重选，并确定重选到所述第二小区。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理模块用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
以所述第一用户身份，通过所述收发模块接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态、RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述处理模块，还用于停止以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述处理模块，还用于当以所述第二用户身份进入RRC连接态时，以所述第二用户身份与所述第二小区建立连接。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态，所述第一消息携带第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示将所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块还用于：
以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二用户身份的标识；和/或，
以所述第二用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第一用户身份的标识；
其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
结合第六方面，在第六方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述核心网设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
关于第六方面或第六方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第一方面或第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第七方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第二通信装置。所述第二通信装置用于执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第二通信装置可以包括用于执行第二方面或第二方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第二通信装置是终端设备为例。其中，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
所述处理模块，用于以所述第一用户身份从第一小区进入RRC连接态；
所述收发模块，用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置；
所述处理模块，还用于以所述第一用户身份根据所述第一配置收发数据或者执行测量，所述第一配置为所述第二用户身份使用的配置；
其中，以所述第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
结合第七方面，在第七方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述接入网设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置；
所述处理模块，还用于基于所述第三消息修改所述第一配置，以及，以所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据或者执行测量。
关于第七方面或第七方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第二方面或第二方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第八方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第三通信装置。所述第三通信装置用于执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第三通信装置可以包括用于执行第三方面或第三方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为接入网设备。下面以第三通信装置是接入网设备为例。其中，
所述处理模块，用于确定终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态，其中，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和第二用户身份；
所述收发模块，用于向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发模块，还用于向所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置。
结合第八方面，在第八方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述处理模块，还用于确定所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区；
所述收发模块，还用于向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，所述第一接入网设备为所述第二小区所属的接入网设备。
关于第八方面或第八方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第三方面或第三方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第九方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第四通信装置。所述第四通信装置用于执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第四通信装置可以包括用于执行第四方面或第四方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为接入网设备。下面以第四通信装置是接入网设备为例。其中，
所述收发模块，用于接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为对应于第二用户身份的标识，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份，所述终端设备以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态；
所述处理模块，用于根据所述第二标识确定所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于所述终端设备；
所述收发模块，还用于将所述第二标识发送给网络设备，所述第二标识用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备驻留在所述接入网设备下的小区。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
所述处理模块，还用于根据所述第二标识，确定所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备当前驻留的小区是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区；
所述收发模块，还用于只在所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区发送所述寻呼消息。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
所述处理模块，还用于根据所述第二标识，确定所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文信息；
所述收发模块，还用于向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发模块，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的针对第一用户身份的N2消息，所述N2消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达；
所述收发模块，还用于向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达。
结合第九方面，在第九方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC空闲态时，所述网络设备是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的服务核心网设备；
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC非激活态时，所述网络设备是存储所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文的接入网设备。
关于第九方面或第九方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第四方面或第四方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十方面，提供一种通信装置，例如该通信装置为如前所述的第五通信装置。所述第五通信装置用于执行上述第五方面或第五方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法。具体地，所述第五通信装置可以包括用于执行第五方面或第五方面的任一可能的实施方式中的方法的模块，例如包括处理模块和收发模块。示例性地，所述第五通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第五通信装置是终端设备为例。其中，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
所述处理模块，用于以所述第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态；
所述收发模块，用于以所述第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息 携带第二标识，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的标识，所述第二标识用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，其中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态；
所述收发模块，还用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自所述接入网设备的RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态；
所述处理模块，还用于以所述第二用户身份进入所述RRC连接态。
结合第十方面，在第十方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于所述RRC空闲态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的S-TMSI；
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于所述RRC非激活态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的I-RNTI。
关于第十方面或第十方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第五方面或第五方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十一方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第一通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的，还可以包括收发器。处理器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。可选的，第一通信装置还可以包括存储器。处理器、存储器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第一方面或第一方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第一通信装置是终端设备为例。其中，如果第一通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。其中，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
所述处理器，用于以所述第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以所述第二用户身份驻留在所述第一小区；
所述处理器，还用于确定更换服务小区到第二小区；
所述处理器，还用于以所述第一用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区；
其中，所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区：
通过小区选择过程或小区重选过程，确定驻留到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于无线资源控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述小区重选过程是根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行的，其中所述第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息是根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和/或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息来确定的，
所述第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息；
所述第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器用于通过如下方式通过小区选择过程，确定驻留到第二小区：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区选择，并确定选择到所述第二小区。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器用于通过如下方式通过小区重选过程，确定驻留到第二小区：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区重选，并确定重选到所述第二小区。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述处理器用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
以所述第一用户身份，通过所述收发器接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态、RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述处理器，还用于停止以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述处理器，还用于当以所述第二用户身份进入RRC连接态时，以所述第二用户身份与所述第二小区建立连接。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态，所述第一消息携带第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示将所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发器还用于：
以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二用户身份的标识；和/或，
以所述第二用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第一用户身份的标识；
其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发器，还用于向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
结合第十一方面，在第十一方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发器，还用于接收来自所述核心网设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
关于第十一方面或第十一方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第一 方面或第一方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十二方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第二通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的，还可以包括收发器。处理器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。可选的，第二通信装置还可以包括存储器。处理器、存储器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第二方面或第二方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第二通信装置是终端设备为例。其中，如果第二通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。其中，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
所述处理器，用于以所述第一用户身份从第一小区进入RRC连接态；
所述收发器，用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置；
所述处理器，还用于以所述第一用户身份根据所述第一配置收发数据或者执行测量，所述第一配置为所述第二用户身份使用的配置；
其中，以所述第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发器，还用于以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
结合第十二方面，在第十二方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发器，还用于接收来自所述接入网设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置；
所述处理器，还用于基于所述第三消息修改所述第一配置，以及，以所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据或者执行测量。
关于第十二方面或第十二方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第二方面或第二方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十三方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第三通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的，还可以包括收发器。处理器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。可选的，第三通信装置还可以包括存储器。处理器、存储器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第三方面或第三方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为接入网设备。下面以第三通信装置是接入网设备为例。其中，如果第三通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的 芯片，那么收发器例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。其中，
所述处理器，用于确定终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态，其中，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和第二用户身份；
所述收发器，用于向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置。
结合第十三方面，在第十三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发器，还用于接收来自所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
结合第十三方面，在第十三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
结合第十三方面，在第十三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，所述收发器，还用于向所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置。
结合第十三方面，在第十三方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述处理器，还用于确定所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区；
所述收发器，还用于向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，所述第一接入网设备为所述第二小区所属的接入网设备。
关于第十三方面或第十三方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第三方面或第三方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十四方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第四通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的，还可以包括收发器。处理器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第四方面或第四方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。可选的，第三通信装置还可以包括存储器。处理器、存储器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第四方面或第四方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为接入网设备。下面以第四通信装置是接入网设备为例。其中，如果第四通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第四通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。其中，
所述收发器，用于接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为对应于第二用户身份的标识，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份，所述终端设备以第二用户身份处于无线资源控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态；
所述处理器，用于根据所述第二标识确定所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于所述终端设备；
所述收发器，还用于将所述第二标识发送给网络设备，所述第二标识用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备驻留在所述接入网设备下的小区。
结合第十四方面，在第十四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发器，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
所述处理器，还用于根据所述第二标识，确定所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备当前驻留的小区是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区；
所述收发器，还用于只在所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区发送所述寻呼消息。
结合第十四方面，在第十四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发器，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
所述处理器，还用于根据所述第二标识，确定所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文信息；
所述收发器，还用于向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达。
结合第十四方面，在第十四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
所述收发器，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的针对第一用户身份的N2消息，所述N2消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达；
所述收发器，还用于向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达。
结合第十四方面，在第十四方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC空闲态时，所述网络设备是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的服务核心网设备；
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC非激活态时，所述网络设备是存储所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文的接入网设备。
关于第十四方面或第十四方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第四方面或第四方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十五方面，提供一种通信装置，该通信装置例如为如前所述的第五通信装置。该通信装置包括处理器。可选的，还可以包括收发器。处理器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第五方面或第五方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。可选的，第三通信装置还可以包括存储器。处理器、存储器和收发器相互耦合，用于实现上述第五方面或第五方面的各种可能的实施方式所描述的方法。示例性地，所述第五通信装置为通信设备，或者为设置在通信设备中的芯片或其他部件。示例性的，所述通信设备为终端设备。下面以第五通信装置是终端设备为例。其中，如果第五通信装置为通信设备，收发器例如通过通信设备中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第五通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，那么收发器例如为芯片中的通信接口，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以 通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。其中，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
所述处理器，用于以所述第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态；
所述收发器，用于以所述第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的标识，所述第二标识用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，其中，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态；
所述收发器，还用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自所述接入网设备的RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态；
所述处理器，还用于以所述第二用户身份进入所述RRC连接态。
结合第十五方面，在第十五方面的一种可能的实施方式中，
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于所述RRC空闲态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的S-TMSI；
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于所述RRC非激活态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的I-RNTI。
关于第十五方面或第十五方面的各种可能的实施方式的技术效果，可以参考对于第五方面或第五方面的相应的实施方式的技术效果的介绍。
第十六方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的第一通信装置。示例性地，所述第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。该通信装置包括：通信接口，用于进行信息的收发，或者说，用于与其他装置进行通信；以及处理器，处理器与通信接口耦合。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码。或者，该通信装置也可以不包括存储器，存储器可以位于该通信装置外部。其中，存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使该通信装置执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。
其中，如果第一通信装置为通信设备，所述通信接口，该通信接口可以是第一通信装置中的收发器，例如通过所述通信装置中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第一通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，则所述通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等。
第十七方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的第二通信装置。示例性地，所述第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。该通信装置包括：通信接口，用于进行信息的收发，或者说，用于与其他装置进行通信；以及处理器，处理器与通信接口耦合。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码。或者，该通信装置也可以不包括存储器，存储器可以位于该通信装置外部。其中，存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使该通信装置执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。
其中，如果第二通信装置为通信设备，所述通信接口，该通信接口可以是第二通信装置中的收发器，例如通过所述通信装置中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第二通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，则所述通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口， 例如输入/输出管脚等。
第十八方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的第三通信装置。示例性地，所述第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片。示例性地，所述通信设备为接入网设备。该通信装置包括：通信接口，用于进行信息的收发，或者说，用于与其他装置进行通信；以及处理器，处理器与通信接口耦合。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码。或者，该通信装置也可以不包括存储器，存储器可以位于该通信装置外部。其中，存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使该通信装置执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。
其中，如果第三通信装置为通信设备，所述通信接口，该通信接口可以是第三通信装置中的收发器，例如通过所述通信装置中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第三通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，则所述通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等。
第十九方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的第四通信装置。示例性地，所述第四通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片。示例性地，所述通信设备为接入网设备。该通信装置包括：通信接口，用于进行信息的收发，或者说，用于与其他装置进行通信；以及处理器，处理器与通信接口耦合。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码。或者，该通信装置也可以不包括存储器，存储器可以位于该通信装置外部。其中，存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使该通信装置执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。
其中，如果第四通信装置为通信设备，所述通信接口，该通信接口可以是第四通信装置中的收发器，例如通过所述通信装置中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第四通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，则所述通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等。
第二十方面，提供一种通信装置。该通信装置可以为上述方法设计中的第五通信装置。示例性地，所述第五通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片。示例性地，所述通信设备为终端设备。该通信装置包括：通信接口，用于进行信息的收发，或者说，用于与其他装置进行通信；以及处理器，处理器与通信接口耦合。可选的，该通信装置还可以包括存储器，用于存储计算机可执行程序代码。或者，该通信装置也可以不包括存储器，存储器可以位于该通信装置外部。其中，存储器所存储的程序代码包括指令，当处理器执行所述指令时，使该通信装置执行上述第五方面或第五方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中的方法。
其中，如果第无通信装置为通信设备，所述通信接口，该通信接口可以是第五通信装置中的收发器，例如通过所述通信装置中的天线、馈线和编解码器等实现。或者，如果第五通信装置为设置在通信设备中的芯片，则所述通信接口可以是该芯片的输入/输出接口，例如输入/输出管脚等。
第二十一方面，提供一种通信***，该通信***包括第六方面所述的通信装置、第十一方面所述的通信装置或第十六方面所述的通信装置。
第二十二方面，提供一种通信***，该通信***包括第七方面所述的通信装置、第十二方面所述的通信装置或第十七方面所述的通信装置，以及，包括第八方面所述的通信装置、第十三方面所述的通信装置或第十八方面所述的通信装置。
第二十三方面，提供一种通信***，该通信***包括第九方面所述的通信装置、第十 四方面所述的通信装置或第十九方面所述的通信装置，以及，包括第十方面所述的通信装置、第十五方面所述的通信装置或第二十方面所述的通信装置。
第二十一方面提供的通信***、第二十二方面提供的通信***、以及第二十三方面提供的通信***，可以是同一个通信***，或者也可以分别是不同的通信***，或者也可能其中的任意两个是同一个通信***，而另一个是不同的通信***。
第二十四方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十五方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十六方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十七方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十八方面，提供一种计算机存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第五方面或第五方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第二十九方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第一方面或第一方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第三十方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第二方面或第二方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第三十一方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第三方面或第三方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第三十二方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第四方面或第四方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
第三十三方面，提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机指令，当所述计算机指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行上述第五方面或第五方面的任意一种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，在更换小区时，两个用户身份不必分别为确定小区更换进行测量或判决等操作，而是由终端设备进行一次相应的测量或判决等操作，确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可，或者由其中一个用户身份进行一次相应的测量或判决等操作以确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可。减少了需要执行的小区更换的过程，从 而减小了终端设备的功耗。
附图说明
图1为网络设备对终端设备发起寻呼的流程图；
图2A为被动模式的终端设备的示意图；
图2B为DSDS模式的终端设备的示意图；
图2C为DSDA模式的终端设备的示意图；
图3A为本申请实施例的一种应用场景示意图；
图3B为本申请实施例的另一种应用场景示意图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种通信方法的流程图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的第一种终端设备的示意性框图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的第一种终端设备的另一示意性框图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的第二种终端设备的示意性框图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的第二种终端设备的另一示意性框图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的第一种接入网设备的示意性框图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的第一种接入网设备的另一示意性框图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的第二种接入网设备的示意性框图；
图19为本申请实施例提供的第二种接入网设备的另一示意性框图；
图20为本申请实施例提供的第三种终端设备的示意性框图；
图21为本申请实施例提供的第三种终端设备的另一示意性框图；
图22为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的示意性框图；
图23为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的另一示意性框图；
图24为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的再一示意性框图；
图25为本申请实施例提供的通信装置的又一示意性框图。
具体实施方式
为了使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本申请实施例作进一步地详细描述。
以下，对本申请实施例中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)终端设备，包括向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备，具体的，包括向用户提 供语音的设备，或包括向用户提供数据连通性的设备，或包括向用户提供语音和数据连通性的设备。例如可以包括具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、或连接到无线调制解调器的处理设备。该终端设备可以经无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)与核心网进行通信，与RAN交换语音或数据，或与RAN交互语音和数据。该终端设备可以包括用户设备(user equipment，UE)、无线终端设备、移动终端设备、设备到设备通信(device-to-device，D2D)终端设备、车到一切(vehicle to everything，V2X)终端设备、机器到机器/机器类通信(machine-to-machine/machine-type communications，M2M/MTC)终端设备、物联网(internet of things，IoT)终端设备、订户单元(subscriber unit)、订户站(subscriber station)，移动站(mobile station)、远程站(remote station)、接入点(access point，AP)、远程终端(remote terminal)、接入终端(access terminal)、用户终端(user terminal)、用户代理(user agent)、或用户装备(user device)等。例如，可以包括移动电话(或称为“蜂窝”电话)，具有移动终端设备的计算机，便携式、袖珍式、手持式、计算机内置的移动装置等。例如，个人通信业务(personal communication service，PCS)电话、无绳电话、会话发起协议(session initiation protocol，SIP)话机、无线本地环路(wireless local loop，WLL)站、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、等设备。还包括受限设备，例如功耗较低的设备，或存储能力有限的设备，或计算能力有限的设备等。例如包括条码、射频识别(radio frequency identification，RFID)、传感器、全球定位***(global positioning system，GPS)、激光扫描器等信息传感设备。
作为示例而非限定，在本申请实施例中，该终端设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备或智能穿戴式设备等，是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称，如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上，或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备，更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能，例如：智能手表或智能眼镜等，以及只专注于某一类应用功能，需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用，如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能头盔、智能首饰等。
而如上介绍的各种终端设备，如果位于车辆上(例如放置在车辆内或安装在车辆内)，都可以认为是车载终端设备，车载终端设备例如也称为车载单元(on-board unit，OBU)。
本申请实施例中，终端设备还可以包括中继(relay)。或者理解为，能够与基站进行数据通信的都可以看作终端设备。
本申请实施例中，用于实现终端设备的功能的装置可以是终端设备，也可以是能够支持终端设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***，该装置可以被安装在终端设备中。本申请实施例中，芯片***可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现终端的功能的装置是终端设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
2)网络设备，例如包括接入网(access network，AN)设备，例如基站(例如，接入点)，可以是指接入网中在空口通过一个或多个小区与无线终端设备通信的设备，或者例如，一种车到一切(vehicle-to-everything，V2X)技术中的网络设备为路侧单元(road side unit，RSU)。基站可用于将收到的空中帧与IP分组进行相互转换，作为终端设备与接入网的其余部分之间的路由器，其中接入网的其余部分可包括IP网络。RSU可以是支持V2X 应用的固定基础设施实体，可以与支持V2X应用的其他实体交换消息。网络设备还可协调对空口的属性管理。例如，网络设备可以包括长期演进(long term evolution，LTE)***或高级长期演进(long term evolution-advanced，LTE-A)中的演进型基站(NodeB或eNB或e-NodeB，evolutional Node B)，或者也可以包括第五代移动通信技术(the 5th generation，5G)新空口(new radio，NR)***(也简称为NR***)中的下一代节点B(next generation node B，gNB)或者也可以包括云接入网(cloud radio access network，Cloud RAN)***中的集中式单元(centralized unit，CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit，DU)，本申请实施例并不限定。
网络设备还可以包括核心网设备，核心网设备例如包括访问和移动管理功能(access and mobility management function，AMF)等。
本申请实施例中，用于实现网络设备的功能的装置可以是网络设备，也可以是能够支持网络设备实现该功能的装置，例如芯片***，该装置可以被安装在网络设备中。在本申请实施例提供的技术方案中，以用于实现网络设备的功能的装置是网络设备为例，描述本申请实施例提供的技术方案。
3)本申请实施例中，“用户身份”(例如第一用户身份或第二用户身份等)为逻辑概念。例如，“用户身份”可以对应SIM卡或签约用户信息或虚拟SIM卡或用户标识(如国际移动用户标识(international mobile subscriber identity，IMSI)或临时移动用户标识(temporary mobile subscriber identity，TMSI)等)。从网络侧的角度来看，不同的“用户身份”在逻辑上对应网络侧服务的不同通信实体，比如4G和5G***中的UE，例如一个支持两个用户身份的终端设备，对于网络侧来说，可以看做两个通信实体。再例如，“用户身份”对应SIM卡或签约用户信息时，网络侧会将支持不同SIM卡或不同签约用户信息的两个终端设备识别为两个不同的通信实体，也会将支持多个不同SIM卡或多个签约用户信息的同一终端设备识别为多个不同的通信实体，即使在实际上，支持多个不同SIM卡或多个签约用户信息的终端设备只是一个物理实体。本申请实施例中将主要以“用户身份”对应SIM卡为例进行说明。
示例性地，SIM卡可以理解为终端设备接入移动网络的钥匙，为了便于描述，本申请实施例中将SIM卡以及其演进都统称为SIM卡。例如SIM卡可以是全球移动通信***(global system for mobile communications，GSM)数字移动电话用户的身份识别卡，用于存储用户的身份识别码和密钥，并支持GSM***对用户的鉴权；又例如，SIM卡也可以是全球用户识别卡(universal subscriber identity module，USIM)，也可以称为升级SIM卡。
4)无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)状态，终端设备有3种RRC状态：RRC连接态(connected态)、RRC空闲态(idle态)和非激活态(inactive态)。
RRC连接态(或，也可以简称为连接态。在本文中，“连接态”和“RRC连接态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备与网络建立了RRC连接，可以进行数据传输。
RRC空闲态(或，也可以简称为空闲态。在本文中，“空闲态”和“RRC空闲态”，是同一概念，两种称呼可以互换)：终端设备没有与网络建立RRC连接，基站没有存储该终端设备的上下文。如果终端设备需要从RRC空闲态进入RRC连接态，则需要发起RRC连接建立过程。
RRC非激活态(或，也可以简称为非激活态。在本文中，“去活动态”、“去激活态”、“非激活态”、“RRC非激活态”和“RRC去激活态”，是同一概念，这几种称呼可以互换)： 终端设备之前进入了RRC连接态，然后基站释放了RRC连接，但是基站保存了该终端设备的上下文。如果该终端设备需要从RRC非激活态再次进入RRC连接态，则需要发起RRC连接恢复过程(或者称为RRC连接重建立过程)。RRC恢复过程相对于RRC建立过程来说，时延更短，信令开销更小。但是基站需要保存终端设备的上下文，会占用基站的存储开销。
当终端设备没有数据传输时，为了省电，终端设备进入RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。在该状态下，终端设备需要以一定的周期在一定的位置醒过来，监听网络是否有寻呼该终端设备。可参考图1，为网络设备对终端设备发起寻呼的流程图。
S11、终端设备的下行数据到达核心网设备。
S12、核心网设备向基站发送寻呼(paging)消息，基站接收来自核心网设备的paging消息。
对于处于RRC空闲态的终端设备，当有下行数据到达核心网设备(即网络要发送数据给终端设备)时，核心网发送paging消息给该终端设备注册区域下的多个基站，以触发多个基站在空口发送paging消息，图1只以其中一个基站为例。该paging消息可以包括该终端设备的S临时移动用户识别码(S-temporary mobile subscriber identity，S-TMSI)。
S13、基站确定该终端设备的寻呼时机。
对于RRC非激活态的终端设备，当有下行数据到达基站时，基站可以确定该终端设备的寻呼时机。
S14、基站通过空口发送paging消息，终端设备接收来自基站的paging消息。
基站触发paging消息的发送。其中，如果基站配置了无线接入网通知区域(radio access network-based notification area，RNA)，基站会在RNA指示的小区，在该终端设备的寻呼时机发送paging。如果RNA指示的小区中有属于其他基站的小区，则该基站可以向其他基站发送paging消息，其他基站可以在该终端设备的寻呼时机，通过空口发送paging消息。
其中，paging消息可以携带用户设备寻呼身份(UE paging identity)，以便接收paging消息的终端设备能够识别该paging消息是否是发送给自己的。
终端设备在该终端设备的寻呼时机可以监听物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)，以接收paging消息。在收到paging消息，并确定该终端设备被寻呼后，该终端设备会在当前驻留的小区上发起新的RRC连接建立过程，或发起RRC连接恢复过程，以进入RRC连接态。
5)本申请实施例中的术语“***”和“网络”可被互换使用。“至少一个”是指一个或者多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B的情况，其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a,b,或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c,或a-b-c，其中a,b,c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
以及，除非有相反的说明，本申请实施例提及“第一”、“第二”等序数词是用于对多个对象进行区分，不用于限定多个对象的大小、顺序、时序、优先级或者重要程度等。例如，第一信道带宽和第二信道带宽，只是为了区分不同的信道带宽，而并不是表示这两个信道带宽的大小、优先级或者重要程度等的不同。
本申请实施例可以应用于各种通信***，例如：LTE***、LTE-A***、NR***或未来可能的通信***，具体不做限制。
前文介绍了本申请实施例所涉及到的一些名词概念，下面介绍本申请实施例涉及的技术特征。
当前越来越多的智能手机支持同时***两张SIM卡，例如，一张SIM卡用于私人业务，另一张SIM卡用于工作；或者，一张SIM卡用于数据业务，另一张SIM卡用于语音业务。其中，一个手机中的两个SIM卡可以属于同一移动运营商，也可以属于不同的移动运营商；可以属于同一制式(制式包括NR，LTE，宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access，WCDMA)，时分多址(time division multiple access，TDMA)2000，或GSM等)，也可以属于不同制式。根据终端设备的收发能力的不同，双SIM卡的终端设备可以具有以下三种模式中的一种：
1、被动(passive)模式，或者也称为DSSS模式：尽管能***两张SIM卡，但是同一个时间只有一个能使用。
可参考图2A，为被动模式的示意图。图2A中，以两个SIM卡分别为USIM1和USIM2为例。在时间1，USIM1工作(或者说处于RRC连接态(connected))，也就是USIM1可以收发数据，此时USIM2不能被使用；或者，在时间2，USIM2工作(或者说处于RRC连接态)，也就是USIM2可以收发数据，此时USIM1不能被使用。
2、DSDS模式：两个SIM卡共享一套收发机，对于空闲(idle)态，收发机需要监听两张卡的寻呼消息。例如收发机可以采用时分复用(time division multiple，TDM)方式来进行监听。
可参考图2B，为DSDS模式的示意图。图2B中，以两个SIM卡分别为USIM1和USIM2为例。在时间1，USIM1工作(或者说处于RRC连接态)，也就是USIM1可以收发数据，此时USIM2可以处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态(inactive)；或者，USIM2工作(或者说处于RRC连接态)，也就是USIM2可以收发数据，此时USIM1可以处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
3、DSDA模式：两个SIM卡使用各自的收发机。两个SIM卡可以同时处于RRC连接态，即终端设备可以同时接收和发送两个SIM卡的数据。
可参考图2C，为DSDA模式的示意图。图2C中，以两个SIM卡分别为USIM1和USIM2为例。当USIM1工作时(或者说进入RRC连接态时)，也就是USIM1收发数据时，USIM2也可以工作，即，USIM2和USIM1可以同时处于RRC连接态。
当空闲或RRC非激活态的终端设备驻留在一个小区后，随着该终端设备的移动，该终端设备可能需要更换到另一个更高优先级或更好信号的小区驻留，这就是小区重选过程。当空闲或RRC非激活态的终端设备驻留在一个小区后，随着该终端设备的移动，该终端设备的服务小区可能会不可用，或不适合继续驻留，则该终端设备需要更换到合适的小区进行驻留，或者终端设备刚开机，需要找到一个合适的小区进行驻留，这就是小区选择过程。小区选择是尽快找到一个合适小区的过程，小区重选是选择更适合的小区的过程。如果终端设备从基站接收到专用小区重选优先级配置，则终端设备使用专用小区重选优先级配置进行小区重选，否则终端设备使用小区广播的小区重选优先级配置。其中，小区重选优先级配置，是指为一些频率配置了优先级，终端设备在进行小区重选时，需要对相应的频率进行测量，以选择合适的小区，终端设备可以优先选择优先级较高的频率对应的小区。 例如终端设备测量了频率1和频率2，在频率1下有小区1符合小区重选条件，在频率2下有小区2符合小区重选条件，但频率1的优先级低于频率2的优先级，则终端设备重选到小区2。
以终端设备支持两个SIM卡为例，两个SIM卡可能同属于一个运营商。但两个SIM卡依然需要各自独立进行小区选择或重选等过程，对于终端设备来说功耗较大。
鉴于此，提供本申请实施例的技术方案。在本申请实施例中，终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，例如第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，在更换小区时，两个用户身份可以均更换服务小区，且继续更换到同一小区，那么两个用户身份不必分别为确定小区更换(例如，小区重选、小区选择或小区切换等)进行测量或判决等操作，而是由终端设备进行一次相应的测量或判决等操作，确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可，或者由其中一个用户身份进行一次相应的测量或判决等操作以确定第二小区，再将两个用户身份均更换到第二小区即可。减少了需要执行的小区更换的过程，从而减小了终端设备的功耗。
请参见图3A，为本申请实施例的一种应用场景。在图3A中包括一个接入网设备、一个核心网设备以及一个终端设备。其中，该接入网设备例如工作在演进的通用移动通信***陆地无线接入(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access，E-UTRA)***中，或者工作在NR***中，或者工作在下一代通信***或其他通信***中。该核心网设备例如工作在E-UTRA***中，或者工作在NR***中，或者工作在下一代通信***或其他通信***中，图3A中，以核心网设备工作在5G核心网(5GC)为例。当然，在本申请实施例中，一个接入网设备可以服务于多个终端设备，图3A只是以其中的一个终端设备为例，一个核心网设备也可以服务于多个接入网设备，图3A只以其中的一个接入网设备为例。
因为本申请实施例的方案可能还涉及到小区切换或小区重选等过程，可能涉及到多个接入网设备。因此请参见图3B，为本申请实施例的另一种应用场景。在图3B中包括接入网设备1、接入网设备2、核心网设备1、核心网设备2和一个终端设备。图3B以接入网是下一代(next generation，NG)NG-无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)为例，核心网设备和接入网设备之间可以通过NG接口通信，接入网设备和接入网设备之间可以通过Xn接口通信。另外，接入网设备和终端设备之间可以通过Uu接口通信。其中，这两个接入网设备例如工作在演进的通用移动通信***陆地无线接入(evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access，E-UTRA)***中，或者工作在NR***中，或者工作在下一代通信***或其他通信***中。这两个核心网设备例如工作在E-UTRA***中，或者工作在NR***中，或者工作在下一代通信***或其他通信***中。
图3A或图3B中的接入网设备例如为基站。其中，接入网设备在不同的***对应不同的设备，例如在4G***中可以对应eNB，在5G***中对应5G中的接入网设备，例如gNB。同理，核心网设备在不同的***对应不同的设备，例如在4G***中可以对应移动管理实体(mobility management entity，MME)，在5G***中对应5G中的核心网设备，例如AMF。当然本申请实施例所提供的技术方案也可以应用于未来的移动通信***中，因此图3A或图3B中的接入网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信***中的接入网设备，核心网设备也可以对应未来的移动通信***中的核心网设备。图3A或图3B以接入网设备是基站为例，实际上参考前文的介绍，接入网设备还可以是RSU等设备。
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例提供的技术方案。需要说明的是，在下文中，将终端 设备能够安装一个SIM卡，认为是终端设备支持一个用户身份，例如，能够安装两个SIM卡的终端设备，就可以支持两个用户身份，可以理解为，SIM卡和用户身份是一一对应的关系。本文主要是以终端设备支持两个用户身份为例，这两个用户身份分别称为第一用户身份和第二用户身份。其中，第一用户身份可以理解为，是终端设备安装了SIM卡1后具有的用户身份，第二用户身份可以理解为，是终端设备安装了SIM卡2后具有的用户身份。而在其它可能的实施例中，如果终端设备能够支持安装两个以上的SIM卡，则终端设备也就可以支持两个以上的用户身份，例如终端设备可以支持三个用户身份、四个用户身份或更多的用户身份，并可以注册在两个以上的网络中，其中每个用户身份可以注册在一个网络中。本申请实施例将主要基于终端设备支持两个用户身份进行描述，当终端设备支持两个以上的用户身份时，其具体实现可以参照终端设备支持两个用户身份的相关描述，可能需要做一些简单的适配，但是也在本申请实施例的保护范围内。
其中，当终端设备的用户身份为第一用户身份时，从网络侧的角度来看，终端设备可以理解为一个用户(从协议的角度来看，就是一个终端设备，例如，称为第一用户)；当终端设备的用户身份为第二用户身份时，从网络侧的角度来看，终端设备可以理解为又一个用户(例如，称为第二用户)。终端设备可以以第一用户身份注册在第一网络，以及以第二用户身份注册在第二网络。本申请实施例中，终端设备支持一个用户身份，也可以描述为，终端设备具有一个用户身份。同理，终端设备支持两个用户身份，也可以描述为，终端设备具有两个用户身份。
另外需要说明的是，在本申请的各个实施例中所述的，“第一用户身份的终端设备”，可以理解为，“终端设备的第一用户身份”，这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的，这两种描述方式可以互换。同理，“第二用户身份的终端设备”，可以理解为，“终端设备的第二用户身份”，这两种描述方式所指示的内容是相同的，这两种描述方式可以互换。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，请参见图4，为该方法的流程图。在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例。图4所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，如果将本实施例应用在图3A所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的核心网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的终端设备。或者，如果将本实施例应用在图3B所示 的网络架构，则下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的核心网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S401、终端设备以第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以第二用户身份驻留在第一小区。
这里所述的“驻留在第一小区”，也包括针对RRC连接态。例如，终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，那么终端设备以第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，指的是，第一小区是第一用户身份的该终端设备的服务小区。
例如，终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。那么，终端设备是以第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，是以第二用户身份驻留在第一小区。
或者，终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。那么，终端设备是以第一用户身份接入在第一小区(第一小区是第一用户身份的终端设备的服务小区)，以及，是以第二用户身份驻留在第一小区。
或者，终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以第二用户身份处于RRC连接态。那么，终端设备是以第一用户身份接入在第一小区(第一小区是第一用户身份的终端设备的服务小区)，以及，是以第二用户身份接入在第一小区(第一小区是第二用户身份的终端设备的服务小区)。
S402、终端设备向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份的归属(home)公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network，PLMN)相同。核心网设备接收来自终端设备的第三指示信息，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
其中，每个用户身份都可以对应一个PLMN的身份号(ID)，第一用户身份和第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同，可以理解为，第一用户身份对应的PLMN的ID和第二用户身份对应的PLMN的ID是相同的。
在本申请实施例中，终端设备支持至少两个用户身份，至少两个用户身份包括第一用户身份和第二用户身份。其中，第一用户身份和第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同，可以理解为，第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个运营商。
终端设备例如可以以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，例如在终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络时，可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。或者终端设备也可以通过其他消息将第三指示信息发送给核心网设备。可选地，第三指示信息可以包括第二用户身份的ID，例如第二用户身份的S-TMSI。
或者，终端设备可以以第二用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，例如在终端设备以第二用户身份注册到网络时，可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。或者终端设备也可以通过其他消息将第三指示信息发送给核心网设备。可选地，第三指示信息包括第一用户身份的ID，例如第一用户身份的S-TMSI。
终端设备以任意一个用户身份将第三指示信息发送给核心网设备即可，无需通过两个用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，可以减少信令开销。
或者，终端设备既以第一用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，也以第二用户身份向核心网设备发送第三指示信息。例如，在终端设备以第一用户身份注册到网络时，可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。另外，在终端设备以第二用户身份注册到网络时，也 可以在注册请求中携带第三指示信息。终端设备通过两个用户身份均向核心网设备发送第一指示信息，可以起到验证的作用，例如，核心网设备只有在接收了终端设备通过两个用户身份发来的第三指示信息，才确认该第三指示信息的指示为“真”，而如果核心网设备只接收了终端设备通过一个用户身份发来的第三指示信息，并未接收终端设备通过另一个用户身份发来的指示信息，则核心网设备认为第三指示信息不可靠，可能并不会按照第一指示信息的指示来调度终端设备。
S402可以发生在S401之前，或者，S402可以发生在S401之后，或者，S401和S402可以同时发生。
S403、核心网设备向终端设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息用于指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。终端设备接收来自核心网设备的第四指示信息，则终端设备确保第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
对于一个终端设备来说，属于同一个运营商的两个用户身份是否总是具有相同的服务小区，可以由核心网设备来配置，或者也可以通过协议规定等，这里以核心网设备配置为例。
例如核心网设备配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，则核心网设备可以向终端设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，终端设备接收第四指示信息，终端设备确保第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区；或者，如果核心网设备并不配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，即，核心网设备并不限制第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区，第一用户身份的服务小区和第二用户身份的服务小区可以相同也可以不同，在这种情况下，核心网设备可以不向终端设备发送第四指示信息，终端设备未接收来自核心网设备的第四指示信息，就可以确定对第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不限制。在这种情况下，对于第四指示信息的取值不做限制。而且核心网设备如果确定不限制第一用户身份的服务小区和第二用户身份的服务小区相同，则可以不向终端设备发送第四指示信息，有助于节省信令开销。
或者，例如核心网设备配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，则核心网设备可以向终端设备发送第四指示信息，第四指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，终端设备接收第四指示信息，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区；或者，如果核心网设备并不配置第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，即，核心网设备并不限制第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区，第一用户身份的服务小区和第二用户身份的服务小区可以相同也可以不同，在这种情况下，核心网设备也可以向终端设备发送第四指示信息，此时第四指示信息可以指示对第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不限制，终端设备接收第四指示信息，就可以确定对第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不限制。在这种情况下，第四指示信息可以通过不同的取值来指示不同的内容。终端设备总是会接收第四指示信息，可以根据第四指示信息确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份是否总是具有相同的服务小区，指示较为明确。
在本申请实施例中，如果一个用户身份可以对应多个小区，例如第一用户身份可以连接多个小区，和/或，第二用户身份可以连接多个小区，那么所述的第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，可以理解为，第一用户身份的主小区和第二用户身份的 主小区相同，第一用户身份的辅小区和第二用户身份的辅小区可以相同，也可以不同。
当然，S402和S403只是可选的步骤，终端设备也可以通过其他方式确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
S404、确定更换服务小区到第二小区。
这里的确定更换到第二小区，可以包括通过小区重选过程确定重选(或，驻留)到第二小区，或者通过小区选择过程确定选择(或，驻留)到第二小区，或者通过小区切换过程确定切换到第二小区。
例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份确定更换到第二小区，或者以第二用户身份确定更换到第二小区，相当于终端设备只进行一次更换过程。例如更换过程(小区重选过程、小区选择过程或小区切换过程等)涉及到测量，如果终端设备只进行一次更换过程，那么终端设备可以只进行一次测量过程(或者说，一轮测量过程)，无需以每个用户身份分别进行测量过程，减少了终端设备的测量过程，节省终端设备的功耗。
S405、终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区。
也就是说，在更换小区时，两个用户身份均更换服务小区，且继续更换到同一小区，这样可以保证两个用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
关于终端设备如何确定更换服务小区到第二小区，在不同的场景下可能有不同的实现方式。下面通过几个实施例来举例介绍。后文将要介绍的图5～图7中的任意一个附图所示的实施例，都可以与图4所示的实施例结合应用。或者，图5～图7中的任意一个附图所示的实施例，也可以分别单独应用。
请参考图5，为本申请提供的另一实施例的流程图，该实施例提供了一种通信方法，该通信方法介绍了，在终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的情况下，终端设备如何进行小区重选或小区选择，相当于在该实施例中，所述的更换小区，可以是指小区重选或小区选择。在该实施例中，例如第一用户身份和第二用户身份都处于RRC空闲态或都处于RRC非激活态，或者第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态，第二用户身份处于RRC非激活态，或者第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态，第一用户身份处于RRC非激活态。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例。图5所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以 第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是终端设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，如果将本实施例应用在图3A所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的终端设备。或者，如果将本实施例应用在图3B所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S501、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息(dedicated cell reselection priority)，第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，终端设备根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息可以确定当以第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
例如，终端设备以第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及以第二用户身份驻留在第一小区。
例如，第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息可以用于配置以第一用户身份进行小区重选的过程中所测量的频率的优先级，或者用于配置以第一用户身份小区重选过程中所测量的小区的优先级，或者用于配置以第一用户身份进行小区重选的过程中所测量的频率的优先级，以及配置以第一用户身份进行小区重选的过程中所测量的小区的优先级。
终端设备在以第一用户身份进行小区重选的过程中，可能会测量一个或多个频率，从而选择合适的小区。第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息就可以配置终端设备以第一用户身份测量的全部频率或部分频率的优先级，从而终端设备可以决定测量哪些频点的小区，以及根据测量结果和频率的优先级选择小区。例如，终端设备测量了频率1和频率2，在频率1下有小区1符合小区重选条件，在频率2下有小区2符合小区重选条件。但频率1的优先级低于频率2的优先级，则终端设备可以确定第一用户身份重选到小区2。
例如，第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息可以包括在RRC连接释放(RRC connection release)消息中发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，或者也可以包括在其他消息中发送给第一用户身份的终端设备。
S502、接入网设备向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，终端设备根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息可以确定当以第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
例如，第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息可以用于配置以第二用户身份进行小区重选的过程中所测量的频率的优先级，或者用于配置以第二用户身份小区重选的过程中所测量的小区的优先级，或者用于配置以第二用户身份小区重选的过程中所测量的频率的优先级，以及配置以第二用户身份小区重选的过程中所测量的小区的优先级。
终端设备在以第二用户身份进行小区重选的过程中，可能会测量一个或多个频率，从而选择合适的小区。第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息就可以配置终端设备以第二用户身份测量的全部频率或部分频率的优先级，从而终端设备可以决定测量哪些频点的小区，以及根据测量结果和频率的优先级选择小区。例如，终端设备测量了频率1和频率2，在频率1下有小区1符合小区重选条件，在频率2下有小区2符合小区重选条件。但频率1的 优先级低于频率2的优先级，则终端设备可以确定第二用户身份重选到小区2。
例如，第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息可以包括在RRC连接释放消息中发送给第二用户身份的终端设备，或者也可以包括在其他消息中发送给第二用户身份的终端设备。
S501可以在S502之前执行，或者，S501可以在S502之后执行，或者，S501和S502可以同时执行。
S503、终端设备确定第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息为小区重选过程中使用的配置信息。
终端设备可以根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
其中，根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，例如可以直接将第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，也可以选择第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息中的部分信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，也可以在第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息中添加部分信息，将添加信息后的第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，例如可以直接将第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，也可以选择第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息中的部分信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，也可以在第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息中添加部分信息，将添加信息后的第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，例如可以将第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息合并，整体作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，可以将第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，可以将第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息中的部分信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，也可以在第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息中再添加部分信息，将添加信息后的第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
例如，接入网设备可能只向终端设备发送一套配置信息，那么终端设备就只会接收一套配置信息。例如接入网设备只向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备只以第一用户身份接收第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不会以第二用户身份接收第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备可以根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，接入网设备只向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备只以第二用户身份接收第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，而不会以第一用户身份接收第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备 可以根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
或者，接入网设备向终端设备发送两套配置信息，则终端设备可以接收两套配置信息。例如，接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，以及向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份接收第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息，以及以第二用户身份接收第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息。则，终端设备可以根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者，根据第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者，根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息得到第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。例如，终端设备可以随机选择根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息；或者，第一用户身份对应的SIM卡和第二用户身份对应的SIM卡，有一个是主卡，另一个是副卡，则终端设备可以选择主卡对应的专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息，或者选择副卡对应的专用小区重选优先级配置信息作为第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息。
例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份确定第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息为小区重选过程中使用的配置信息；或者，以第二用户身份确定第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息为小区重选过程中使用的配置信息；或者，以第一用户身份确定第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息为小区重选过程中使用的配置信息，以及以第二用户身份确定第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息为小区重选过程中使用的配置信息。
其中，如果终端设备执行的是小区选择过程，那么S502和S503也可以不必执行。
S504、终端设备通过小区重选过程或小区选择过程，确定驻留到第二小区。
其中，S504可以看做是图4所示的实施例中的S404的一种实施方式。
也就是说，终端设备通过小区重选过程或小区选择过程，确定更换服务小区到第二小区，这里的更换，可以是指小区重选，或者是指小区选择。其中，第二小区可以是所述接入网设备下的小区，或者也可以是其他接入网设备下的小区。在本申请实施例中，一个小区是一个接入网设备下的小区，可以理解为，该小区是该接入网设备所覆盖的区域，或者说，该小区是该接入网设备服务的小区。例如，第二小区是所述接入网设备下的小区，可以理解为，第二小区是该接入网设备所覆盖的区域，或者说，第二小区是该接入网设备服务的小区。
如果终端设备执行小区重选，则终端设备可以根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来执行小区重选过程。例如，终端设备可以不以任何一个用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第一小区，也就是说，终端设备可以直接进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区；或者，终端设备也可以以第一用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区；或者，终端设备也可以以第二用户身份来进行小区重选，并确定重选到第二小区。终端设备可以只执行一次小区重选过程，无需以不同的用户身份分别执行小区重选过程，减少了需要执行的小区重选过程，有助于减小终端设备的功耗。
或者，终端设备也可以执行小区选择。例如，终端设备可以不以任何一个用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区，也就是说，终端设备可以直接进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区。或者，终端设备也可以以第一用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第二小区，或者，终端设备也可以以第二用户身份来进行小区选择，并确定选择到第 二小区。终端设备可以只执行一次小区选择过程，无需以不同的用户身份分别执行小区选择过程，减少了需要执行的小区选择过程，有助于减小终端设备的功耗。
S505、终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区。
其中，S505可以看做是图4所示的实施例中的S405的一种实施方式。
相当于，终端设备以第一用户身份驻留到第二小区，以及，也以第二用户身份驻留到第一小区，从而可以满足，第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区(这里应该认为是所驻留的小区)。例如，终端设备可以只执行一次小区重选过程(或小区选择过程)，无需以不同的用户身份分别执行小区重选过程(或小区选择过程)，减少了需要执行的小区重选过程(或小区选择过程)，有助于减小终端设备的功耗。
图5所示的实施例中，第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。请参考图6，为本申请提供的另一实施例的流程图，该实施例提供了一种通信方法，该通信方法介绍了，在终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的情况下，如果一个用户身份要进行小区切换，则另一个用户身份应如何处理。在该实施例中，例如第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，或者，第二用户身份处于RRC连接态，第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。在下文的介绍过程中，以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态为例。相当于在该实施例中，所述的第一用户身份更换小区，可以是指小区切换，所述的第二用户身份更换小区，可以是指小区重选或小区选择。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例。图6所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是终端设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，如果将本实施例应用在图3A所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的终端设备。或者，如果将本实施例应用在图3B所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S601、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一消息，第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到第二 小区。终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，根据第一消息确定更换服务小区到第二小区。
其中，终端设备根据第一消息确定更换服务小区到第二小区，可以看做是图4所示的实施例中的S404的一种实施方式。
例如，第一消息例如为切换命令。因为终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，因此，接入网设备可以将第一消息发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，而终端设备可以以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，图6就是以接入网设备可以将第一消息发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息为例。第一消息可以指示以第一用户身份更换小区到第二小区。这里所述的以第一用户身份更换小区到第二小区，可以是指以第一用户身份切换到第二小区。
当然在S601之前，终端设备还可以进行相应的测量过程等，在此不做限制。
其中，终端设备例如以第一用户身份驻留在所述接入网设备的第一小区，以及，以第一用户身份驻留在该第一小区。该接入网设备可以是第一用户身份的终端设备的源接入网设备，第一小区可以是第一用户身份的终端设备的源小区，第二小区可以是第一用户身份的终端设备的目标小区。
S602、终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区。
例如，终端设备以第一用户身份进行小区切换，例如切换后的小区(目标小区)为第二小区。也就是说，终端设备以第一用户身份切换到第二小区。
另外，终端设备不以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。例如，如果终端设备在以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态之前，以第二用户身份在进行小区重选或小区选择，那么在以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态时，终端设备停止以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，这也意味着，当终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态后，终端设备不以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，例如，停止以第二用户身份进行测量，以停止以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择；或者说终端设备停止以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
终端设备以第一用户身份进行小区切换，所执行的可以是正常的小区切换流程，不多赘述。
图6中，以终端设备的第一用户身份的源小区和目标小区(即第二小区)不属于同一个接入网设备为例，相当于终端设备以第一用户身份从源接入网设备切换到目标接入网设备。这里的源接入网设备，可以是S601中所述的接入网设备。
S603、终端设备以第二用户身份驻留到第二小区。
其中，S602和S603可以看做是图4所示的实施例中的S405的一种实施方式。
终端设备以第一用户身份切换到了第二小区，则第二小区是第一用户身份的终端设备的服务小区。那么为了满足第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份驻留到第二小区，这样，两个用户身份总是处于同一个小区。而且终端设备无需以第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择，只需根据第一用户身份的小区切换结果将第二用户身份驻留到第二小区即可，减少了小区重选过程或小区选择过程，减小了终端设备的功耗。
S604、当终端设备以第二用户身份进入连接态时，终端设备以第二用户身份与第二小 区建立连接。
当处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态的第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态时(例如网络侧有第二用户身份的下行数据到达，则第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态)，由于第二用户身份驻留的小区与RRC连接态的第一用户身份的服务小区是同一个小区，即第二小区，因此，终端设备以第二用户身份从驻留小区进入RRC连接态后的服务小区也与RRC连接态的第一用户身份的服务小区是同一个服务小区，也就是说，终端设备可以以第二用户身份直接接入所驻留的第二小区，从而终端设备的两个用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
其中，第二小区可以是所述的接入网设备下的小区，或者也可以是其他的接入网设备下的小区。图6以第二小区是所述的接入网设备下的小区为例。
图5或图6所示的实施例中，总是有用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。请参考图7，为本申请提供的另一实施例的流程图，该实施例提供了一种通信方法，该通信方法介绍了，在终端设备的第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的情况下，终端设备如何执行小区切换。在该实施例中，例如第一用户身份和第二用户身份都处于RRC连接态。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例。图7所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，如果将本实施例应用在图3A所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的终端设备。或者，如果将本实施例应用在图3B所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S701、接入网设备向终端设备发送第一消息，第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到第二小区。终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，根据第一消息确定更换服务小区到第二小区。
其中，终端设备根据第一消息确定更换服务小区到第二小区，可以看做是图4所示的实施例中的S404的一种实施方式。
例如在更换小区之前，终端设备以第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以第二用户 身份驻留在第一小区。终端设备以第一用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态，以及，以第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。该接入网设备可以是第一用户身份的终端设备和第二用户身份的终端设备的源接入网设备，第一小区可以是第一用户身份的终端设备和第二用户身份的终端设备的源小区，第二小区可以是第一用户身份的终端设备和第二用户身份的终端设备的目标小区。
例如，第一消息例如为切换命令。因为终端设备以第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以第二用户身份处于RRC连接态，因此，接入网设备可以将第一消息发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，而终端设备可以以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息；或者，接入网设备可以将第一消息发送给第二用户身份的终端设备，而终端设备可以以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息；或者，接入网设备也可以将第一消息发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，也将第一消息发送给第二用户身份的终端设备，而终端设备可以以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，以及以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息。
作为一种可选的方式，第一消息还可以携带第一指示信息，第一指示信息指示将第一用户身份和第二用户身份更换小区到第二小区。通过这种具体的指示，使得终端设备更明确如何为第一用户身份和第二用户身份更换小区。或者，第一指示信息只是指示更换小区到第二小区，而并不具体指示究竟是第一用户身份更换小区还是第二用户身份更换小区。因为第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此终端设备根据第一指示信息可以明确将第一用户身份和第二用户身份都更换到第二小区。
当然在S701之前，终端设备还可以进行相应的测量过程等，在此不做限制。
作为一种可选的实施方式，在S701之前，终端设备可以向接入网设备发送第二指示信息。第二指示信息包括第一标识或第二标识，第一标识为第一用户身份的标识，第二标识为第二用户身份的标识，第二指示信息用于指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。例如，终端设备以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息可以包括第二标识，或者，终端设备以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息可以包括第一标识。接入网设备接收第二指示信息后，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，从而也可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
例如，第一标识和第二标识都可以是小区无线网络临时标识(cell radio network temporary identifier，C-RNTI)。第一标识是第一用户身份的C-RNTI，例如称为C-RNTI 1，第二标识是第二用户身份的C-RNTI，例如称为C-RNTI 2。而C-RNTI是用户身份在进入RRC连接态后终端设备才能获得的，因此，终端设备可以用后一个进入RRC连接态的用户身份向网络设备发送第二指示信息。例如，第一用户身份先进入RRC连接态，第二用户身份后进入RRC连接态，则终端设备在第一用户身份进入RRC连接态后可以获得C-RNTI 1，在第二用户身份进入RRC连接态后可以获得C-RNTI 2，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份向网络设备发送第二指示信息。
S702、终端设备根据第一消息，以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区。
其中，S702可以看做是图4所示的实施例中的S405的一种实施方式。
终端设备接收第一消息后，可以以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，以及，以 第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区。因为终端设备以第一用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态，因此，终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，可以是，终端设备以第一用户身份切换到第二小区。同理，终端设备是以第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态，因此，终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区，可以是，终端设备以第二用户身份切换到第二小区。其中，终端设备可以先以第一用户身份切换到第一小区，之后以第二用户身份切换到第一小区；或者，终端设备可以先以第二用户身份切换到第一小区，之后以第一用户身份切换到第一小区；或者，终端设备可以同时以第一用户身份切换到第一小区，以及以第二用户身份切换到第一小区。
在本申请实施例中，由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此接入网设备只需发送一次切换命令，终端设备就可以将第一用户身份和第二用户身份均切换到第一小区，无需网络设备分别给不同的用户身份发送切换命令，有助于节省信令开销。
另外考虑到，如果第一用户身份和第二用户身份的服务小区不同，那么终端设备需要以第一用户身份和第二用户身份分别在各自的服务小区检测寻呼消息。如果终端设备在两个服务小区检测寻呼消息的寻呼时机的时间相同，但终端设备又只有一套收发机，那么终端设备只能在其中一个服务小区检测寻呼消息，从而就会漏检另一个服务小区的寻呼消息。但是在如上的图4～图7中的任意一个附图所示的实施例中，由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以在同一小区检测寻呼消息，即使终端设备以第一用户身份检测寻呼消息的寻呼时机和以第二用户身份检测寻呼消息的寻呼时机的时间相同，终端设备也可以一并检测，解决了寻呼冲突的问题，减少了对寻呼消息的漏检。
在第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件下，本申请实施例还考虑，可以让第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置。因此，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，请参考图8，为该通信方法的流程图。图8所示的实施例可以与图4所示的实施例结合应用，或者也可以单独应用。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例。图8所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，如果将本实施例应用在图3A所示的网络架构，则下 文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的终端设备。或者，如果将本实施例应用在图3B所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S801、终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
终端设备进入RRC连接态，也就是与接入网设备建立RRC连接，对于该过程不多赘述。例如终端设备以第二用户身份是在第一小区进入RRC连接态。
S802、接入网设备向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第一配置，终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一配置。
第一配置可以包括物理层配置、测量配置、或空口参数配置中的一种或多种。例如，第一配置包括物理层配置；或者，第一配置包括测量配置；或者，第一配置包括物理层配置和测量配置；或者，第一配置包括空口参数配置；或者，第一配置可以包括物理层配置、测量配置、以及空口参数配置，等等。
例如，物理层配置可包括如下的一种参数或如下多种参数的任意组合：带宽部分(bandwidth part，BWP)配置，多输入多输出(multiple-input multiple-output，MIMO)参数配置，功控参数配置，物理下行控制信道(physical downlink control channel，PDCCH)配置，物理下行控制信道(physical uplink control channel，PUCCH)配置，物理下行共享信道(physical downlink shared channel，PDSCH)配置，或，物理上行共享信道(physical uplink shared channel，PUSCH)配置。例如，物理层配置包括BWP配置；或者，物理层配置包括MIMO配置和功控参数配置；或者，物理层配置包括PDCCH配置、PUCCH配置、PDSCH配置和PUSCH配置；或者，物理层配置包括BWP配置、功控参数配置、PDCCH配置、PUCCH配置、PDSCH配置和PUSCH配置，等等。
测量配置可以包括与终端设备进行测量相关的参数的配置信息。例如，测量配置可以包括为终端设备所配置的测量周期，或者可以包括为终端设备配置的测量间隔(gap)等。
空口参数配置，可以包括除了C-RNTI、安全参数配置、以及数据无线承载(data radio bearer)配置之外的其他的空口参数的配置信息。
终端设备在以第二用户身份接收第一配置后，可以以第二用户身份使用第一配置。例如，第一配置包括物理层配置，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者例如，第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
S803、终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态。
在终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态后，终端设备又以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态。例如终端设备以第二用户身份是在第一小区进入RRC连接态。同样的，对于终端设备进入RRC连接态的过程不多赘述。
S804、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，第一消息用于指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层。其中，共享物理层，可以理解为，共享物理层配置。
例如，接入网设备事先知晓第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，且确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。那么，接入网设备在发现终端设备先是以第二用户身份进入了RRC连接态，之后又以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态后， 就可以向终端设备发送第一消息，指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层，或者，指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置。
作为一种可选的方式，第一消息例如包括第三指示信息，第三信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置。
作为一种可选的方式，在S804之前，可以执行S805，即，终端设备以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第二消息，第二消息可以包括第二标识，第二标识可以是第二用户身份的标识，第二用户身份的标识例如为第二用户身份的C-RNTI。接入网设备接收的是来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息，而第二消息又包括第二标识，从而接入网设备就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
作为一种可选的方式，第二消息还可以包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于第一用户身份请求使用第二用户身份所使用的配置。接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息，根据第一指示信息就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以使用相同的配置。例如，第一指示信息用于第一用户身份请求与第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层，其中，共享物理层，可以理解为，共享物理层配置。
第二消息例如为RRC建立完成(RRC setup complete)消息或RRC恢复完成(RRC resume complete)消息，或者也可以是其他消息，例如可以是新引入的一个RRC消息，该新引入的RRC消息的名称例如为多SIM信息(multiple SIM information)消息。
S806、终端设备以第一用户身份根据第一配置收发数据和/或执行测量，第一配置为终端设备以第二用户身份使用的配置。
也可以理解为，终端设备将第二用户身份使用的第一配置用于第一用户身份。例如，第一配置包括物理层配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者例如，第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
因为接入网设备也知道第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，且确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，则接入网设备确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以使用相同的配置。又因为接入网设备已经向第二用户身份的终端设备发送了第一配置，因此，接入网设备无需再向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一配置，终端设备可以内部实现共享，也就是说，终端设备可以将第二用户身份所使用第一配置，或者说，将以第二用户身份接收的第一配置，用于第一用户身份，从而两个用户身份可以共享同一套配置。这样接入网设备只需发送一次第一配置即可，无需给两个用户身份分别发送第一配置，节省信令开销。而且，接入网设备也只需配置一次，也就是说，接入网设备只需要得到第一配置，无需为不同的用户身份分别确定不同的配置，减少了接入网设备的配置过程。
通过同一个终端设备的两个用户身份共享相同的第一配置，或者共享同一个物理层，从而使得双卡双待的终端设备有能力实现双卡双激活的效果，提高了用户体验。
当接入网设备需要修改第一配置时，可以执行下面的步骤。
S807、接入网设备向终端设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于修改第一配置。终端设备接收来自接入网设备的第三消息，根据第三消息确定修改第一配置。
例如，接入网设备可以对第一配置进行修改，例如接入网设备修改了第一配置中的全部参数的取值或部分参数的取值。则接入网设备需要将修改信息发送给终端设备，以便终 端设备能够修改第一配置。
例如，接入网设备可以向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息；或者，接入网设备可以向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息。即，接入网设备只需向终端设备发送一次第三消息即可，无需分别向不同的用户身份发送第三消息，节省信令开销。图8以接入网设备向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息为例。而且不同的用户身份对应的是同一套配置，接入网设备只需针对一套配置(第一配置)进行修改，无需对不同的用户身份对应的配置分别进行修改，减少了接入网设备的工作量。
S808、终端设备基于第三消息修改第一配置。
终端设备接收第三消息后，就可以根据第三消息修改第一配置，而修改前的第一配置不再使用，这样就完成了对于配置信息的更新。
例如，终端设备是以第一用户身份接收的第三消息，那么终端设备可以以第一用户身份来修改第一配置，得到修改后的第一配置。图8以终端设备以第一用户身份来修改第一配置为例。
S809、终端设备以第一用户身份使用修改后的第一配置，以及，以第二用户身份使用修改后的第一配置。
在得到修改后的第一配置后，终端设备可以以第一用户身份使用修改后的第一配置。而由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以共享同一套配置，因此终端设备也可以以第二用户身份使用修改后的第一配置。
其中，以一个用户身份使用修改后的第一配置，可以理解为，是以该用户身份使用修改后的第一配置收发数据和/或执行测量。例如，修改后的第一配置包括物理层配置，终端设备以第一用户身份使用修改后的第一配置，可以理解为，终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者，修改后的第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
另外，如果接入网设备确定终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，或者，确定终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，或者，确定终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，以及确定终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区(其中，由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此如果要更换服务小区，则两个用户身份都可能会进行更换服务小区的动作，而且会更换到同一个小区。因此，接入网设备只需确定其中一个用户身份要更换服务小区即可，或者接入网设备也可以一并确定两个用户身份都要更换服务小区)，那么，如果第二小区和第一小区都属于该接入网设备，则该接入网设备可以不进行操作，但如果第二小区和第一小区不属于同一个接入网设备，则，该接入网设备可以向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，第一接入网设备为第二小区所属的接入网设备，例如将本实施例的技术方案应用于图3B所示的网络架构，则第一接入网设备可以是图3B中的接入网设备2。第一接入网设备接收来自该接入网设备的第二指示信息后，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，也就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。那么，如果第一接入网设备也要向终端设备发送相应的配置，则第一接入网设备也只需向终端设备发送一套配置即可，两个用户身份可以共用这一套配置。该配置例如称为第二配置，关于第二配置 可能包括的内容，可参考对于第一配置的介绍，二者是类似的。
此外，由于是同一个终端设备，并且共享第一配置，那么作为一种可选的方式，该方法还可以包括如下的S810。
S810、终端设备向接入网设备发送参考信息，接入网设备接收来自终端设备的参考信息。
参考信息例如包括参考信号，或包括测量报告，或包括参考信号和测量报告。
参考信号例如为探测参考信号(sounding reference signal，SRS)，或者也可以是其他的参考信号。测量报告例如包括信道状态信息(channel state information，CSI)报告，或包括信道质量指示(channel quality indicator，CQI)报告，或包括CSI报告和CQI报告，等等。
例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息，接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的参考信息；或者，终端设备可以以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息，接入网设备接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的参考信息。图8以终端设备以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息为例。由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置，因此终端设备以第一用户身份进行测量，和以第二用户身份进行测量，得到的测量结果可能是相同或相近的，同理，终端设备以第一用户身份给接入网设备发送参考信号，和以第二用户身份给接入网设备发送参考信号，所发送的参考信号的性质也是相同或相近的。因此在本申请实施例中，终端设备只需通过一个用户身份进行测量，也只需通过一个用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息即可，无需终端设备分别通过不同的用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息，有助于节省信令开销，降低终端设备的实现复杂度。而且即使终端设备通过不同的用户身份向接入网设备分别发送参考信息，所发送的参考信息可能也是相似的，因此让终端设备只通过一个用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息，也可以减少冗余信息。
另外，接入网设备可以将所接收的参考信息应用于第一用户身份和第二用户身份。例如，接入网设备接收了来自第一用户身份的终端设备的CSI报告，接入网设备根据该CSI报告可以进行信道估计，从而可以根据信道估计的结果对终端设备进行调度。那么，接入网设备可以根据该信道估计的结果对第一用户身份的终端设备进行调度，也可以根据该信道估计的结果对第二用户身份的终端设备进行调度。或者，接入网设备接收了来自第一用户身份的终端设备的SRS，接入网设备根据该SRS可以进行测量，从而可以根据测量结果对终端设备进行调度。那么，接入网设备可以根据该测量结果对第一用户身份的终端设备进行调度，也可以根据该测量结果对第二用户身份的终端设备进行调度。
作为一种可选的方式，由于两个用户身份可能共享物理层，因此接入网设备可能不同时调度两个用户身份对应的“用户”。那么，该方法还可以包括如下的S811。
S811、终端设备向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，或不支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份。接入网设备接收来自终端设备的第三指示信息，如果第三指示信息指示终端设备支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，接入网设备根据第三指示信息可以确定终端设备支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份；或者，如果第三指示信息指示终端设备不支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，接入网设备根据第三指示信息可以确定终端设备不支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份。
终端设备根据终端设备的能力可以确定是否支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，并可以将确定的结果发送给接入网设备。接入网设备基于终端设备上报的第三指示信息就可以决定是否能同时调度两个用户身份的数据，以使得接入网设备的调度符合终端设备的实际能力。其中，同时调度两个用户身份，可以是指在同一个调度时间单元内调度两个用户身份，调度时间单元例如为传输时间间隔(transmission time interval，TTI)，或时隙(slot)。
例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息；或者，终端设备可以以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息；或者，终端设备可以以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，也以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备可以接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息，也可以接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息。如果通过两个用户身份都向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，可以起到验证作用，例如，接入网设备接收了来自两个用户身份的相同的第三指示信息，就可以确定第三指示信息所指示的内容是可靠的。图8以终端设备以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息为例。
需要说明的是，图8所示的实施例中的有些步骤可以独立实施，这里并不做限定。例如S810、S811或S810和S811，可以独立于其他步骤实施。再例如，S807至S809可以是独立实施的步骤。
在本申请实施例中，不同的用户身份可以共享同一套配置，从而接入网设备对一个终端设备只需配置一次即可，减少了接入网设备的配置过程。且接入网设备也只需向终端设备发送一次第一配置，无需对不同的用户身份分别发送第一配置，节省信令开销。
图8所示的实施例是在第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件下，让第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置。下面，本申请实施例再提供一种通信方法，依然是在第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件下，让第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置，相当于是，在第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件下，让第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置的另一种方法。请参考图9，为该通信方法的流程图。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例。图8所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在图3A或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，如果将本实施例应用在图3A所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的接入网设备，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3A所示的网络架构中的终端设备。或者，如果将本实施例应用在图3B所示的网络架构，则下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S901、终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
终端设备进入RRC连接态，也就是与接入网设备建立RRC连接，对于该过程不多赘述。例如终端设备以第二用户身份是在第一小区进入RRC连接态。
S902、接入网设备向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第一配置，终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一配置。
关于第一配置的介绍，可参考图8所示的实施例中S802的相关介绍。
终端设备在以第二用户身份接收第一配置后，可以以第二用户身份使用第一配置。例如，第一配置包括物理层配置，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者例如，第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
S903、终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态。
在终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态后，终端设备又以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态。例如终端设备以第二用户身份是在第一小区进入RRC连接态。同样的，对于终端设备进入RRC连接态的过程不多赘述。
S904、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，第一消息用于指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层。其中，共享物理层，可以理解为，共享物理层配置。
例如，接入网设备事先知晓第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，且确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。那么，接入网设备在发现终端设备先是以第二用户身份进入了RRC连接态，之后又以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态后，就可以向终端设备发送第一消息，指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享物理层，或者，指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享同一套配置。
作为一种可选的方式，第一消息例如包括第三指示信息，第三信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份共享第一配置。
作为一种可选的方式，在S904之前，可以执行S905，终端设备以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第二消息，第二消息可以包括第二标识，第二标识可以是第二用户身份的标识，第二用户身份的标识例如为第二用户身份的C-RNTI。接入网设备接收的是来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息，而第二消息又包括第二标识，从而接入网设备就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
作为一种可选的方式，第二消息还可以包括第一指示信息，第一指示信息用于第一用户身份请求使用第二用户身份所使用的配置。接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第二消息，根据第一指示信息就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以使用相同的配置。例如，第一指示信息用于第一用户身份请求与第二用户身份共享第一配置或共享 物理层，其中，共享物理层，可以理解为，共享物理层配置。
第二消息例如为RRC setup complete消息或RRC resume complete消息，或者也可以是其他消息，例如可以是新引入的一个RRC消息，该新引入的RRC消息的名称例如为multiple SIM information消息。
S906、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一配置，终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一配置。
因为接入网设备也知道第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，且确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，则接入网设备确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份可以使用相同的配置。因此，接入网设备无需再为第一用户身份的终端设备额外做配置，而是可以直接将第一配置发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，从而对于终端设备来说，两个用户身份使用的配置是相同的，都是第一配置，两个用户身份相当于共享同一套配置。这样，接入网设备只需配置一次，也就是说，接入网设备只需要得到第一配置，无需为不同的用户身份分别确定不同的配置，减少了接入网设备的配置过程。
通过同一个终端设备的两个用户身份共享相同的第一配置，或者共享同一个物理层，从而使得双卡双待的终端设备有能力实现双卡双激活的效果，提高了用户体验。
S907、终端设备以第一用户身份根据第一配置收发数据和/或执行测量，第一配置为终端设备以第二用户身份使用的配置。
也可以理解为，终端设备将第二用户身份使用的第一配置用于第一用户身份。例如，第一配置包括物理层配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者例如，第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
S908、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第三消息，第三消息用于修改第一配置。终端设备以第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第三消息，根据第三消息确定修改第一配置。
例如，接入网设备可以对第一配置进行修改，例如接入网设备修改了第一配置中的全部参数的取值或部分参数的取值。则接入网设备需要将修改信息发送给第一用户身份的终端设备，以便终端设备能够以第一用户身份修改第一配置。
S909、终端设备基于第三消息修改第一配置。
终端设备以第一用户身份接收第三消息后，就可以根据第三消息修改第一配置，例如，终端设备以第一用户身份修改第一配置，得到修改后的第一配置。对于第一用户身份来说，修改前的第一配置不再使用，这样就完成了对于第一用户身份所使用的配置的更新。
S910、终端设备以第一用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据和/或执行测量。
可以理解为，终端设备以第一用户身份使用修改后的第一配置。例如，修改后的第一配置包括物理层配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者例如，修改后的第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第一用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
S911、接入网设备向第二用户身份的终端设备发送第四消息，第四消息用于指示修改第一配置。终端设备以第二用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第四消息，根据第四消息确定修改第一配置。
例如，接入网设备对第一配置进行修改，则接入网设备除了需要将修改信息发送给第 一用户身份的终端设备之外，也要将修改信息发送给第二用户身份的终端设备，以便终端设备既能够以第一用户身份修改第一配置，也能够以第二用户身份修改第一配置。
但对于接入网设备来说，由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份是共享同一套配置，因此接入网设备只需要对一套配置(第一配置)进行修改等操作即可，无需对多套配置分别进行修改等操作，减少了接入网设备的工作量。
S912、终端设备基于第四消息修改第一配置。
终端设备以第二用户身份接收第四消息后，就可以根据第四消息修改第一配置，例如，终端设备以第二用户身份修改第一配置，得到修改后的第一配置。图9以终端设备以第二用户身份修改第一配置为例。对于第二用户身份来说，修改前的第一配置不再使用，这样就完成了对于第一用户身份所使用的配置的更新。
S913、终端设备以第二用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据和/或执行测量。
可以理解为，终端设备以第二用户身份使用修改后的第一配置。例如，修改后的第一配置包括物理层配置，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据该物理层配置收发数据，或者例如，修改后的第一配置包括测量配置，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份根据该测量配置执行测量。
S908～S910可以看做一个过程，S911～S913可以看做一个过程，那么S908～S910可以在S911～S913之前执行；或者，S908～S910可以在S911～S913之后执行；或者，S908～S910，与S911～S913，两个过程可以同时执行。
另外，如果接入网设备确定终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，或者，确定终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，或者，确定终端设备以第一用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区，以及确定终端设备以第二用户身份更换服务小区到了第二小区(其中，由于第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区，因此如果要更换小区，则两个用户身份都可能会进行更换服务小区的动作，而且会更换到同一个小区。因此，接入网设备只需确定其中一个用户身份要更换服务小区即可，或者接入网设备也可以一并确定两个用户身份都要更换服务小区)，那么，如果第二小区和第一小区都属于该接入网设备，则该接入网设备可以不进行操作，但如果第二小区和第一小区不属于同一个接入网设备，则，该接入网设备可以向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，第二指示信息可以指示第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，第一接入网设备为第二小区所属的接入网设备，例如将本实施例的技术方案应用于图3B所示的网络架构，则第一接入网设备可以是图3B中的接入网设备2。第一接入网设备接收来自该接入网设备的第二指示信息后，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，也就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。那么，如果第一接入网设备也要向终端设备发送相应的配置，则第一接入网设备也只需向终端设备发送一套配置即可，两个用户身份可以共用这一套配置。该配置例如称为第二配置，关于第二配置可能包括的内容，可参考对于第一配置的介绍，二者是类似的。
此外，由于是同一个终端设备，并且共享第一配置，那么作为一种可选的方式，该方法还可以包括如下的S914。
S914、终端设备向接入网设备发送参考信息，接入网设备接收来自终端设备的参考信息。
例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息，接入网设备接收来 自第一用户身份的终端设备的参考信息；或者，终端设备可以以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息，接入网设备接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的参考信息。图9以终端设备以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送参考信息为例。
关于S914，可参考图8所示的实施例中的S810的介绍。
作为一种可选的方式，由于两个用户身份可能共享物理层，因此接入网设备可能不同时调度两个用户身份对应的“用户”。那么，该方法还可以包括如下的S915。
S915、终端设备向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，第三指示信息用于指示终端设备支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，或不支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份。接入网设备接收来自终端设备的第三指示信息，如果第三指示信息指示终端设备支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，接入网设备根据第三指示信息可以确定终端设备支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份；或者，如果第三指示信息指示终端设备不支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份，接入网设备根据第三指示信息可以确定终端设备不支持同时调度第一用户身份和第二用户身份。
例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息；或者，终端设备可以以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息；或者，终端设备可以以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，也以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备可以接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息，也可以接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息。如果通过两个用户身份都向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，可以起到验证作用，例如，接入网设备接收了来自两个用户身份的相同的第三指示信息，就可以确定第三指示信息所指示的内容是可靠的。图9以终端设备以第二用户身份向接入网设备发送第三指示信息，接入网设备接收来自第二用户身份的终端设备的第三指示信息为例。
关于S915，可参考图8所示的实施例中的S811的介绍。
在本申请实施例中，不同的用户身份可以共享同一套配置，从而接入网设备对一个终端设备只需配置一次即可，减少了接入网设备的配置过程。
在第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件下，本申请实施例还考虑解决寻呼问题。因此，本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，请参考图10，为该通信方法的流程图。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3B所示的网络架构为例。图10所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需 的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，下文中所述的第一接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的网络设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备2，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。另外，为了使得叙述更为清楚，在下文中，也将网络设备(例如，可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备2的网络设备)称为第二接入网设备。
S1001、终端设备以第一用户身份向第一接入网设备发送第一消息，第一接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息。第一消息可以携带第二标识，第二标识为第二用户身份的标识。
例如，第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，第二用户身份处于RRC非激活态。第一消息例如为RRC消息，例如为RRC resume complete消息，或者是其他的RRC消息，例如为新引入的一个RRC消息，名称可以是multiple SIM information消息。
S1002、第一接入网设备根据第二标识确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于该终端设备。
第二标识例如为第二用户身份的去活动无线网络临时标识(inactive Radio network temporary identifier，I-RNTI)，或者也可以是第二用户身份的其他的标识，只要第二标识能够指示第二用户身份即可。第一接入网设备接收的是来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，因此第一接入网设备根据第一消息可以获得第一用户身份的信息，例如可以获得第一标识，第一标识可以是第一用户身份的标识。而第一消息又包括第二标识，因此第一接入网设备根据第一消息，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。而第一接入网设备也知道第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
例如，第一标识为第一用户身份的C-RNTI和服务小区信息，第二标识为第二用户身份的I-RNTI，例如，第一接入网设备可以建立第一用户身份的C-RNTI和服务小区信息与第二用户身份的I-RNTI之间的关联关系，以表明第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
S1003、第一接入网设备将第二标识发送给第二接入网设备，第二接入网设备接收来自第一接入网设备的第二标识，第二接入网设备为保存了第二用户身份的上下文的接入网设备。
相当于，处于RRC非激活态的第二用户身份的上下文保存在第二接入网设备，也可以认为，第二接入网设备是第二用户身份的锚点接入网设备。其中，第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备可以是同一个接入网设备，或者也可以是不同的接入网设备。如果第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备是同一个接入网设备，那么S1003可以不必执行，或者，如果第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备是不同的接入网设备，则可以执行S1003，例如第一接入网设备可以通过Xn接口将第二标识发送给第二接入网设备。
第二标识可以指示第二用户身份的终端设备驻留在第一接入网设备下的小区，或者说，第二标识可以指示第二用户身份的终端设备驻留在第一接入网设备。
S1004、第二接入网设备确定第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态。或者说，第二接入网设备确定终端设备需要以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
例如，在第二用户身份的下行数据到达时，第二接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态，以接收下行数据。或者在其他一些情况下，第二接入网设备也可能确定第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态。
其中，如果第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备是同一个接入网设备，那么S1004也就是第一接入网设备执行的。
S1005、第二接入网设备仅向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，第一接入网设备接收来自第二接入网设备的第三消息，第三消息用于指示寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备或指示终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。在S1005之后，可以执行S1006和S1007，或者，也可以执行S1008和S1009，即，S1006和S1007，与S1008和S1009，是择一执行的关系。究竟执行S1006和S1007，还是执行S1008和S1009，可以通过协议规定，或者由接入网设备决定。
这里所述的，第二接入网设备仅向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，是指，第二接入网设备只会向第一接入网设备发送第三消息，而不会向其他的接入网设备发送第三消息。第二接入网设备接收第二标识后，可以确定第二标识对应的接入网设备，即第一接入网设备，从而可以确定第二标识对应的第二用户身份是驻留在第一接入网设备下的小区。那么，如果第二标识对应的第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态，第二接入网设备就只需向第一接入网设备发送第三消息即可，无需再向其他的接入网设备发送第三消息，这样可以减少第三消息的数量，以及减少空口的寻呼数量，节省传输开销。
第三消息例如为寻呼消息。例如，该寻呼消息可以携带第二标识。
其中，如果第一接入网设备和第二接入网设备是同一个接入网设备，那么S1005无需执行。
S1006、第一接入网设备根据第二标识，确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区是第一用户身份的终端设备所在的服务小区。
第三消息携带了第二标识，第二标识例如为第二用户身份的I-RNTI。第一接入网设备例如已经存储了第一用户身份的C-RNTI和第二用户身份的I-RNTI之间的关联关系，那么第一接入网设备通过查询该关联关系，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，从而第一接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区就是第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区。例如第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区为第一小区，则第一接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区也是第一小区。
S1007、第一接入网设备只在第一用户身份的服务小区发送寻呼消息，终端设备在该服务小区以第二用户身份检测(或者，监听)寻呼消息。
第一接入网设备确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区就是第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区，那么，第一接入网设备就只需在该服务小区发送寻呼消息即可，无需再在其他的小区发送寻呼消息，这样可以减少寻呼消息的数量，节省传输开销。
例如，该寻呼消息可以携带第二标识，从而终端设备以第二用户身份监听到该寻呼消息后，根据第二标识就可以确定该寻呼消息是对应于第二用户身份的寻呼消息，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
S1008、第一接入网设备根据第二标识，确定第一用户身份的终端设备的上下文信息。
例如，第二标识为第二用户身份的I-RNTI，第一接入网设备根据第二用户身份的 I-RNTI，可以查找到第一用户身份的终端设备的上下文信息。
S1009、第一接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第二消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收第二消息，第二消息可以指示第二用户身份的终端设备需要进入RRC连接态或指示第二用户身份有寻呼消息到达。
第二消息例如为RRC消息。在这种方式下，第一接入网设备无需在空口发送寻呼消息，而是可以直接向第一用户身份的终端设备发送RRC消息，即通过向第一用户身份发送RRC消息来触发第二用户身份(例如通过终端设备内部触发，例如终端设备内部，第一用户身份的模块可以通知第二用户身份的模块)进入RRC连接态，从而节省了寻呼消息的开销。而且处于RRC非激活态的第二用户身份无需监听空口的寻呼消息，也使得终端设备更为省电。
另外，如果第一用户身份发生小区切换，则第一接入网设备作为第一用户身份的源接入网设备，可以将第二用户身份的I-RNTI发送给第一用户身份的目标接入网设备。该目标接入网设备可以通过Xn接口向第二接入网设备(也就是第二用户身份的锚点接入网设备，或者说，是存储了第二用户身份的终端设备的上下文的接入网设备)发送消息，例如称为第五消息，第五消息可以携带第二用户身份的I-RNTI，从而使得第二接入网设备可以将第二用户身份的位置更新到目标接入网设备。如果第二用户身份也需要进入RRC连接态，则第二接入网设备只需向目标接入网设备发送寻呼消息即可，无需再向第一接入网设备发送寻呼消息。通过这种方式，使得第二用户身份所驻留的接入网设备的信息能够得到及时更新。
通过本申请实施例提供的技术方案，存储了终端设备的用户身份的上下文的接入网设备，能够较为准确地知道该终端设备的该用户身份所驻留的接入网设备或所驻留的小区，从而无需向多个接入网设备或多个小区发送寻呼消息，有助于节省寻呼消息的开销。而且，第一接入网设备也可以知道终端设备的用户身份所驻留的小区，从而只需在该小区发送寻呼消息，也可以进一步节省寻呼消息的开销。或者，第一接入网设备可以无需发送寻呼消息，而是直接向相应的用户身份发送RRC消息，可以在更大程度上节省寻呼消息的开销。
本申请实施例提供一种通信方法，请参考图11，为该通信方法的流程图。该方法继续是在第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区的条件下，考虑解决寻呼问题。与图10所示的实施例不同的是，图11所示的实施例中，第二用户身份是处于RRC空闲态，而图11所示的实施例中，第二用户身份是处于RRC非激活态。
在下文的介绍过程中，以该方法应用于图3B所示的网络架构为例。图11所示的实施例提供的方法可由两个通信装置执行，这两个通信装置例如为第一通信装置和第二通信装置，其中，第一通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第一通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。对于第二通信装置也是同样，第二通信装置可以是网络设备或能够支持网络设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，或者第二通信装置可以是终端设备或能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需的功能的通信装置，当然还可以是其他通信装置，例如芯片***。且对于第一通信装置和第二通信装置的实现方式均不做限制，例如第一通信装置可以是网络设备，第二通信装置可以是终端设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是网络设备，或者第一通信装置和第二通信装置都是终端设备，或者第一通信装置是网络设备，第二通信装置是能够支持终端设备实现该方法所需 的功能的通信装置，等等。
为了便于介绍，在下文中，以该方法由网络设备和终端设备执行为例，也就是说，以第一通信装置是网络设备、第二通信装置是网络设备为例。因为本实施例是以应用在或图3B所示的网络架构为例，因此，下文中所述的接入网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的接入网设备1，下文中所述的核心网设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的核心网设备1，下文中所述的终端设备可以是图3B所示的网络架构中的终端设备。
S1101、终端设备以第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第一消息，接入网设备接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息。第一消息可以携带第二标识，第二标识为第二用户身份的标识。
例如，第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态。第一消息例如为RRC消息，例如为RRC resume complete消息，或者是其他的RRC消息，例如为新引入的一个RRC消息，名称可以是multiple SIM information消息。
S1102、接入网设备根据第二标识确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于该终端设备。
第二标识例如为第二用户身份的S-TMSI，或者也可以是第二用户身份的其他的标识，只要第二标识能够指示第二用户身份即可。接入网设备接收的是来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，因此接入网设备根据第一消息可以获得第一用户身份的信息，例如可以获得第一标识，第一标识可以是第一用户身份的标识。而第一消息又包括第二标识，因此接入网设备根据第一消息，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。而接入网设备也知道第一用户身份和第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
例如，第一标识为第一用户身份的C-RNTI和服务小区的信息，第二标识为第二用户身份的S-TMSI，例如，第一接入网设备可以建立第一用户身份的C-RNTI和服务小区的信息与第二用户身份的S-TMSI之间的关联关系，以表明第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
S1103、接入网设备将第二标识发送给核心网设备，核心网设备接收来自接入网设备的第二标识。该核心网设备是第一用户身份的终端设备的服务核心网设备。
第二标识可以指示第二用户身份的终端设备驻留在第一接入网设备下的小区，或者说，第二标识可以指示第二用户身份的终端设备驻留在第一接入网设备。
S1104、核心网设备确定第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态。或者说，核心网设备确定终端设备需要以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
例如，在第二用户身份的下行数据到达时，核心网设备可以确定第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态，以接收下行数据。或者在其他一些情况下，核心网设备也可能确定第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态。
S1105、核心网设备仅向该接入网设备发送第三消息，该接入网设备接收来自核心网设备第三消息，第三消息用于指示寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备或指示终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。在S1105之后，可以执行S1106和S1107，或者，也可以执行S1108和S1109，或者，也可以执行S1110和S1111，即，S1106和S1107，S1108和S1109，与S1110和S1111，是择一执行的关系。究竟执行S1106和S1107，还是执行S1108和S1109，还是执行S1110和S1111，可以通过协议规定，或者由接入网设备决定。
这里所述的，核心网设备仅向接入网设备发送第三消息，是指，核心网设备只会向接入网设备发送第三消息，而不会向其他的接入网设备发送第三消息。例如，核心网设备接 收第二标识后，可以确定第二标识对应的接入网设备，即第一接入网设备，例如，核心网设备可以确定第二标识对应的第二用户身份是驻留在该接入网设备下。那么，如果第二标识对应的第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态，核心网设备就只需向该接入网设备发送第三消息即可，无需再向其他的接入网设备发送第三消息，这样可以减少第三消息的数量，节省传输开销。
作为第三消息的一种实现方式，第三消息例如为寻呼消息。例如，该寻呼消息可以携带第二标识。
或者，作为第三消息的另一种实现方式，第三消息例如为N2消息，该N2消息可以与第一用户身份对应。例如，核心网设备可以通过与第一用户身份之间的N2连接向接入网设备发送对应于第一用户身份的消息，因为是通过N2连接发送，因此该消息可以称为N2消息。其中，该N2消息对应于第一用户身份，对此可以理解为，该N2消息携带第一用户身份的AMF UE下一代应用协议(next generation application protocol，NGAP)ID和RAN UE NGAP ID。即核心网向接入网设备发送针对第一用户身份的N2消息，该N2消息指示寻呼第二用户身份的终端设备或指示终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
S1106、接入网设备根据第二标识，确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区是第一用户身份的终端设备所在的服务小区。
例如第三消息为寻呼消息。第三消息携带了第二标识，第二标识例如为第二用户身份的S-TMSI，接入网设备例如已经存储了第一用户身份的C-RNTI和服务小区的信息与第二用户身份的S-TMSI之间的关联关系，那么接入网设备通过查询该关联关系，就可以确定第一用户身份和第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，从而接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区就是第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区。例如第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区为第一小区，则接入网设备可以确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区也是第一小区。
S1107、接入网设备只在第一用户身份的终端设备的服务小区发送寻呼消息，终端设备在该服务小区以第二用户身份检测(或者，监听)寻呼消息。
接入网设备确定第二用户身份的终端设备当前驻留的小区就是第一用户身份的终端设备当前的服务小区，那么，接入网设备就只需在该服务小区发送寻呼消息即可，无需再在其他的小区发送寻呼消息，这样可以减少寻呼消息的数量，节省传输开销。
例如，该寻呼消息可以携带第二标识，从而终端设备以第二用户身份监听到该寻呼消息后，根据第二标识就可以确定该寻呼消息是对应于第二用户身份的寻呼消息，则终端设备可以以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
S1108、接入网设备根据第二标识，确定第一用户身份的终端设备的上下文信息。
例如第三消息为寻呼消息。例如，第二标识为第二用户身份的S-TMSI，接入网设备根据第二用户身份的S-TMSI，可以查找到第一用户身份的终端设备的上下文信息。
S1109、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第二消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收第二消息，第二消息可以指示第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态或指示第二用户身份有寻呼消息到达。
第二消息例如为RRC消息。终端设备以第一用户身份接收第二消息后，可以触发该终端设备以第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
在这种方式下，接入网设备无需在空口发送寻呼消息，而是可以直接向第一用户身份 的终端设备发送RRC消息，即通过向第一用户身份发送RRC消息来触发第二用户身份(例如通过终端设备内部触发，例如终端设备内部，第一用户身份的模块可以通知第二用户身份的模块)进入RRC连接态，从而节省了寻呼消息的开销。而且处于RRC非激活态的第二用户身份无需监听空口的寻呼消息，也使得终端设备更为省电。
S1110、接入网设备根据N2消息，确定第一用户身份的上下文信息。
例如第三消息为N2消息。该N2消息携带第一用户身份的AMF UE NGAP ID和RAN UE NGAP ID，从而接入网设备根据该N2消息就可以确定第一用户身份的上下文信息。
S1111、接入网设备向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第二消息，终端设备以第一用户身份接收第二消息，第二消息用于指示第二用户身份需要进入RRC连接态或指示第二用户身份有寻呼消息到达。
第二消息例如为RRC消息。终端设备以第一用户身份接收第二消息后，可以触发第二用户身份进入RRC连接态，例如，终端设备可以以第一用户身份触发第二用户身份进入RRC连接态，或以第一用户身份指示第二用户身份有寻呼消息到达。
在这种方式下，接入网设备无需在空口发送寻呼消息，而是可以直接向第一用户身份的终端设备发送RRC消息，即通过向第一用户身份发送RRC消息来触发第二用户身份(例如通过终端设备内部触发，例如终端设备内部，第一用户身份的模块可以通知第二用户身份的模块)进入RRC连接态，从而节省了寻呼消息的开销。而且处于RRC非激活态的第二用户身份无需监听空口的寻呼消息，也使得终端设备更为省电。
另外，如果第一用户身份发生小区切换，则该接入网设备作为第一用户身份的源网络设备，可以将第二用户身份的第二标识(例如，第二用户身份的S-TMSI)发送给第一用户身份的目标接入网设备。当核心网设备向第一用户身份的目标接入网设备发送寻呼第二用户身份时，第一用户身份的目标接入网设备可以通过上面的方法，只在第一用户身份的终端设备的服务小区发送寻呼消息，或者向第一用户身份的终端设备发送第二消息以触发第二用户身份进入RRC连接态。
通过本申请实施例提供的技术方案，核心网设备能够较为准确地知道终端设备的用户身份所驻留的接入网设备或所驻留的小区，从而无需向多个接入网设备或多个小区发送寻呼消息，有助于节省寻呼消息的开销。而且，接入网设备也可以知道终端设备的用户身份所驻留的小区，从而只需在该小区发送寻呼消息，也可以进一步节省寻呼消息的开销。或者，接入网设备可以无需发送寻呼消息，而是直接向相应的用户身份发送RRC消息，可以在更大程度上节省寻呼消息的开销。同理，核心网设备也可以无需发送寻呼消息，而是直接向相应的用户身份发送RRC消息，可以在更大程度上节省寻呼消息的开销。
下面结合附图介绍本申请实施例中用来实现上述方法的装置。因此，上文中的内容均可以用于后续实施例中，重复的内容不再赘述。
图12为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1200的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1200例如为终端设备1200。
终端设备1200包括处理模块1210。可选的，还可以包括收发模块1220。示例性地，终端设备1200可以是终端设备，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备1200是终端设备时收发模块1220可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1210可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元(central processing unit，CPU)。当终端设 备1200是具有上述终端功能的部件时，收发模块1220可以是射频单元，处理模块1210可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当终端设备1200是芯片***时，收发模块1220可以是芯片***(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。
其中，处理模块1210可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S401、S404和S405，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1220可以用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S402和S403，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块1210可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S503～S505，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1220可以用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S501和S502，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块1210可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S602～S604，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1220可以用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S601，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块1210可以用于执行图7所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S702，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1220可以用于执行图7所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S701，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块1220可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块1220可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块1220是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块1220是接收模块；或者，收发模块1220也可以是两个功能模块的统称，这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
例如，终端设备1200支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
处理模块1210，用于以所述第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以所述第二用户身份驻留在所述第一小区；
处理模块1210，还用于确定更换服务小区到第二小区；
处理模块1210，还用于以所述第一用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区；
其中，所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区：
通过小区选择过程或小区重选过程，确定驻留到所述第二小区，其中，终端设备1200以所述第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第二用户身份处于RRC 空闲态或RRC非激活态。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
所述小区重选过程是根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行的，其中所述第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息是根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和/或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息来确定的，
所述第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息；
所述第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式通过小区选择过程，确定驻留到第二小区：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区选择，并确定选择到所述第二小区。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式通过小区重选过程，确定驻留到第二小区：
以所述第一用户身份和/或所述第二用户身份进行小区重选，并确定重选到所述第二小区。
作为一种可选的实施方式，处理模块1210用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
以所述第一用户身份，通过收发模块1220接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，终端设备1200以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态、RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
作为一种可选的实施方式，终端设备1200以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，处理模块1210，还用于停止以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
作为一种可选的实施方式，终端设备1200以所述第二用户身份处于所RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，处理模块1210，还用于当以所述第二用户身份进入RRC连接态时，以所述第二用户身份与所述第二小区建立连接。
作为一种可选的实施方式，终端设备1200以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态，所述第一消息携带第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示将所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1220还用于：
以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二用户身份的标识；和/或，
以所述第二用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第一用户身份的标识；
其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1220，还用于向核心网设备发送第三指示信息， 所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1220，还用于接收来自所述核心网设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1210可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1220可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
如图13所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1300。示例性地，通信装置1300例如为终端设备1300。示例性地，终端设备1300可以是通信设备，例如为终端设备，或者也可以是芯片***等。终端设备1300包括处理器1310。可选的，还可以包括存储器1320。可选的，还可以包括收发器1330。其中，存储器1320中存储计算机指令或程序，处理器1310可以执行存储器1320中存储的计算机指令或程序。存储器1320中存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1310用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1210执行的操作，收发器1330用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1220执行的操作。或者，终端设备1300也可以不包括存储器1320，例如存储器位于终端设备1300外部，在外部存储器所存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1310用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1210执行的操作，收发器1330用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1220执行的操作。
其中，收发器1330可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发器1330可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发器1330是发送器，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发器1330是接收器；或者，收发器1330也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送器和接收器，发送器用于完成发送操作，例如发送器可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收器用于完成接收操作，例如接收器可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
另外，如果通信装置1300是芯片***，则收发器1330也可以通过该芯片***的通信接口实现，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。通信接口可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如通信接口可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为通信接口是发送接口，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为通信接口是接收接口；或者，通信接口也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送接口和接收接口，发送接口用于完成发送操作，例如发送接口可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收接口用于完成接收操作，例如接收接口可以用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的终端设备1200或终端设备1300可实现图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中的终端设备的功能，并且终端设备1200或终端设备1300中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图14为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1400的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1400例如为终端设备1400。
终端设备1400包括处理模块1410。可选的，还可以包括收发模块1420。示例性地，终端设备1400可以是终端设备，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备1400是终端设备时收发模块1420可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1410可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当终端设备1400是具有上述终端功能的部件时，收发模块1420可以是射频单元，处理模块1410可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当终端设备1400是芯片***时，收发模块1420可以是芯片***(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。
其中，处理模块1410可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S801、S803、S806、S808和S809，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1420可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S802、S804、S805、S807、S810和S811，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块1410可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S901、S903、S907、S909、S910、S912和S913，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1420可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S902、S904、S905、S906、S908、S911、S914和S915，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块1420可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块1420可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块1420是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块1420是接收模块；或者，收发模块1420也可以是两个功能模块的统称，这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
例如，终端设备1400支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
处理模块1410，用于以所述第一用户身份从第一小区进入RRC连接态；
收发模块1420，用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置；
处理模块1410，还用于以所述第一用户身份根据所述第一配置收发数据或者执行测量，所述第一配置为所述第二用户身份使用的配置；
其中，以所述第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1420，还用于以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备1400。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
收发模块1420，还用于接收来自所述接入网设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置；
处理模块1410，还用于基于所述第三消息修改所述第一配置，以及，以所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据或者执行测量。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1410可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1420可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
如图15所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1500。示例性地，通信装置1500例如为终端设备1500。示例性地，终端设备1500可以是通信设备，例如为终端设备，或者也可以是芯片***等。终端设备1500包括处理器1510。可选的，还可以包括存储器1520。可选的，还可以包括收发器1530。其中，存储器1520中存储计算机指令或程序，处理器1510可以执行存储器1520中存储的计算机指令或程序。存储器1520中存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1510用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1410执行的操作，收发器1530用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1420执行的操作。或者，终端设备1500也可以不包括存储器1520，例如存储器位于终端设备1500外部，在外部存储器所存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1510用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1410执行的操作，收发器1530用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1420执行的操作。
其中，收发器1530可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发器1530可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发器1530是发送器，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发器1530是接收器；或者，收发器1530也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送器和接收器，发送器用于完成发送操作，例如发送器可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收器用于完成接收操作，例如接收器可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
另外，如果通信装置1500是芯片***，则收发器1530也可以通过该芯片***的通信接口实现，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。通信接口可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如通信接口可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为通信接口是发送接口，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为通信接口是接收接口；或者，通信接口也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送接口和接收接口，发送接口用于完成发送操作，例如发送接口可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收接口用于完成接收操作，例如接收接口可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的终端设备1400或终端设备1500可实现图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中的终端设备的功能，并且终端设备1400或终端设备1500中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中的相应流程， 为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图16为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1600的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1600例如为接入网设备1600。
接入网设备1600包括处理模块1610。可选的，还可以包括收发模块1620。示例性地，接入网设备1600可以是接入网设备，也可以是应用于接入网设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述接入网设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当接入网设备1600是接入网设备时收发模块1620可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1610可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当接入网设备1600是具有上述接入网设备的功能的部件时，收发模块1620可以是射频单元，处理模块1610可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当接入网设备1600是芯片***时，收发模块1620可以是芯片***(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。
其中，处理模块1610可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S801和S803，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1620可以用于执行图8所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S802、S804、S805、S807、S810和S811，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块1610可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S901和S903，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1620可以用于执行图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S902、S904、S905、S906、S908、S911、S914和S915，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块1620可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块1620可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中的由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块1620是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块1620是接收模块；或者，收发模块1620也可以是两个功能模块的统称，这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作。
例如，处理模块1610，用于确定终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态，其中，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和第二用户身份；
收发模块1620，用于向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1620，还用于接收来自所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
作为一种可选的实施方式，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用 于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
作为一种可选的实施方式，收发模块1620，还用于向所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
处理模块1610，还用于确定所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区；
收发模块1620，还用于向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，所述第一接入网设备为所述第二小区所属的接入网设备。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1610可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1620可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
如图17所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1700。示例性地，通信装置1700例如为接入网设备1700。示例性地，接入网设备1700可以是通信设备，例如为终端设备，或者也可以是芯片***等。接入网设备1700包括处理器1710。可选的，还可以包括存储器1720。可选的，还可以包括收发器1730。其中，存储器1720中存储计算机指令或程序，处理器1710可以执行存储器1720中存储的计算机指令或程序。存储器1720中存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1710用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1610执行的操作，收发器1730用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1620执行的操作。或者，接入网设备1700也可以不包括存储器1720，例如存储器位于接入网设备1700外部，在外部存储器所存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1710用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1610执行的操作，收发器1730用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1620执行的操作。
其中，收发器1730可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发器1730可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发器1730是发送器，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发器1730是接收器；或者，收发器1730也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送器和接收器，发送器用于完成发送操作，例如发送器可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收器用于完成接收操作，例如接收器可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作。
另外，如果通信装置1700是芯片***，则收发器1730也可以通过该芯片***的通信接口实现，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。通信接口可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如通信接口可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为通信接口是发送接口，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为通信接口是接收接口；或者，通信接口也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送接口和接收接口，发送接口用于完成发送操作，例如发送接口可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收接口用于完成接收操作，例如接收接口可以用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的接入网设备1600或接入网设备1700可实现图8所示的 实施例或图9所示的实施例或中的接入网设备的功能，并且接入网设备1600或接入网设备1700中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例或中的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图18为本申请实施例提供的通信装置1800的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置1800例如为接入网设备1800。
接入网设备1800包括处理模块1810。可选的，还可以包括收发模块1820。示例性地，接入网设备1800可以是接入网设备，也可以是应用于接入网设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述接入网设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当接入网设备1800是接入网设备时收发模块1820可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块1810可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当接入网设备1800是具有上述接入网设备的功能的部件时，收发模块1820可以是射频单元，处理模块1810可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当接入网设备1800是芯片***时，收发模块1820可以是芯片***(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。
其中，处理模块1810可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S1002、S1006和S1008，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1820可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S1001、S1003、S1005、S1007和S1009，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块1810可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S1002、S1006、S1008和S1010，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块1820可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S1101、S1103、S1105、S1107、S1109和S1111，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块1820可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块1820可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中的由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块1820是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块1820是接收模块；或者，收发模块1820也可以是两个功能模块的统称，这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作。
例如，收发模块1820，用于接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为对应于第二用户身份的标识，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份，所述终端设备以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态；
处理模块1810，用于根据所述第二标识确定所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于所述终端设备；
收发模块1820，还用于将所述第二标识发送给网络设备，所述第二标识用于指示所述 第二用户身份的所述终端设备驻留在所述接入网设备下的小区。
作为一种可能的实施方式，
收发模块1820，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
处理模块1810，还用于根据所述第二标识，确定所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备当前驻留的小区是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区；
收发模块1820，还用于只在所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区发送所述寻呼消息。
作为一种可能的实施方式，
收发模块1820，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
处理模块1810，还用于根据所述第二标识，确定所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文信息；
收发模块1820，还用于向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达。
作为一种可能的实施方式，
收发模块1820，还用于接收来自所述网络设备的针对第一用户身份的N2消息，所述N2消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达；
收发模块1820，还用于向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼到达。
作为一种可能的实施方式，
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC空闲态时，所述网络设备是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的服务核心网设备；
当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC非激活态时，所述网络设备是存储所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文的接入网设备。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块1810可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块1820可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
如图19所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置1900。示例性地，通信装置1700例如为接入网设备1900。示例性地，接入网设备1900可以是通信设备，例如为终端设备，或者也可以是芯片***等。接入网设备1900包括处理器1910。可选的，还可以包括存储器1920。可选的，还可以包括收发器1930。其中，存储器1920中存储计算机指令或程序，处理器1910可以执行存储器1920中存储的计算机指令或程序。存储器1920中存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1910用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1810执行的操作，收发器1930用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1820执行的操作。或者，接入网设备1900也可以不包括存储器1920，例如存储器位于接入网设备1900外部，在外部存储器所存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器1910用于执行上述实施例中处理模块1810执行的操作，收发器1930用于执行上述实施例中收发模块1820执行的操作。
其中，收发器1930可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发器1930可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发器1930是发送器，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发器1930是接收器；或者，收发器1930也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送器和接收器，发送器用于完成发送操作，例如发送器可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收器用于完成接收操作，例如接收器可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作。
另外，如果通信装置1900是芯片***，则收发器1930也可以通过该芯片***的通信接口实现，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。通信接口可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如通信接口可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为通信接口是发送接口，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为通信接口是接收接口；或者，通信接口也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送接口和接收接口，发送接口用于完成发送操作，例如发送接口可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收接口用于完成接收操作，例如接收接口可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部接收操作。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的接入网设备1800或接入网设备1900可实现图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例或中的接入网设备的功能，并且接入网设备1800或接入网设备1900中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例或中的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图20为本申请实施例提供的通信装置2000的示意性框图。示例性地，通信装置2000例如为终端设备2000。
终端设备2000包括处理模块2010。可选的，还可以包括收发模块2020。示例性地，终端设备2000可以是终端设备，也可以是应用于终端设备中的芯片或者其他具有上述终端设备功能的组合器件、部件等。当终端设备2000是终端设备时收发模块2020可以是收发器，可以包括天线和射频电路等，处理模块2010可以是处理器，例如基带处理器，基带处理器中可以包括一个或多个CPU。当终端设备2000是具有上述终端功能的部件时，收发模块2020可以是射频单元，处理模块2010可以是处理器，例如基带处理器。当终端设备2000是芯片***时，收发模块2020可以是芯片***(例如基带芯片)的输入输出接口、处理模块可以是芯片***的处理器，可以包括一个或多个中央处理单元。
其中，处理模块2010可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如以第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块2020可以用于执行图10所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S1001、S1007和S1009，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
或者，处理模块2010可以用于执行图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如以第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。收发模块2020可以用于执行图11 所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部收发操作，例如S1101、S1107、S1109和S1111，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另外，收发模块2020可以是一个功能模块，该功能模块既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如收发模块2020可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发模块2020是发送模块，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发模块2020是接收模块；或者，收发模块2020也可以是两个功能模块的统称，这两个功能模块分别为发送模块和接收模块，发送模块用于完成发送操作，例如发送模块可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收模块用于完成接收操作，例如接收模块可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
例如，终端设备2000支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，
处理模块2010，用于以所述第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态；
收发模块2020，用于以所述第一用户身份向接入网设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的标识，所述第二标识用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备2000，其中，终端设备2000以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态；
收发模块2020，还用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自所述接入网设备的RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的终端设备2000有寻呼到达，或指示所述第二用户身份的终端设备2000进入RRC连接态；
处理模块2010，还用于以所述第二用户身份进入所述RRC连接态。
作为一种可选的实施方式，
当所述第二用户身份的终端设备2000处于所述RRC空闲态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的S-TMSI；
当所述第二用户身份的终端设备2000处于所述RRC非激活态时，所述第二标识为所述第二用户身份的I-RNTI。
应理解，本申请实施例中的处理模块2010可以由处理器或处理器相关电路组件实现，收发模块2020可以由收发器或收发器相关电路组件实现。
如图21所示，本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置2100。示例性地，通信装置2100例如为终端设备2100。示例性地，终端设备2100可以是通信设备，例如为终端设备，或者也可以是芯片***等。终端设备2100包括处理器2110。可选的，还可以包括存储器2120。可选的，还可以包括收发器2130。其中，存储器2120中存储计算机指令或程序，处理器2110可以执行存储器2120中存储的计算机指令或程序。存储器2120中存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器2110用于执行上述实施例中处理模块2010执行的操作，收发器2130用于执行上述实施例中收发模块2020执行的操作。或者，终端设备2100也可以不包括存储器2120，例如存储器位于终端设备2100外部，在外部存储器所存储的计算机指令或程序被执行时，该处理器2110用于执行上述实施例中处理模块2010执行的操作，收发器2130用于执行上述实施例中收发模块2020执行的操作。
其中，收发器2130可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接 收操作，例如收发器2130可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为收发器2130是发送器，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为收发器2130是接收器；或者，收发器2130也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送器和接收器，发送器用于完成发送操作，例如发送器可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收器用于完成接收操作，例如接收器可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
另外，如果通信装置2100是芯片***，则收发器2130也可以通过该芯片***的通信接口实现，该通信接口与通信设备中的射频收发组件连接，以通过射频收发组件实现信息的收发。通信接口可以是一个功能单元，该功能单元既能完成发送操作也能完成接收操作，例如通信接口可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如，在执行发送操作时，可以认为通信接口是发送接口，而在执行接收操作时，可以认为通信接口是接收接口；或者，通信接口也可以是两个功能单元的统称，这两个功能单元分别为发送接口和接收接口，发送接口用于完成发送操作，例如发送接口可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部发送操作，接收接口用于完成接收操作，例如接收接口可以用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部接收操作。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的终端设备2000或终端设备2100可实现图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中的终端设备的功能，并且终端设备2000或终端设备2100中的各个模块的操作和/或功能分别为了实现图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是终端设备也可以是电路。该通信装置可以用于执行上述方法实施例中由终端设备所执行的动作。
当该通信装置为终端设备时，图22示出了一种简化的终端设备的结构示意图。便于理解和图示方便，图22中，终端设备以手机作为例子。如图22所示，终端设备包括处理器、存储器、射频电路、天线以及输入输出装置。处理器主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对终端设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据等。存储器主要用于存储软件程序和数据。射频电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。需要说明的是，有些种类的终端设备可以不具有输入输出装置。
当需要发送数据时，处理器对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到终端设备时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器，处理器将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。为便于说明，图22中仅示出了一个存储器和处理器。在实际的终端设备产品中，可以存在一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。存储器也可以称为存储介质或者存储设备等。存储器可以是独立于处理器设置，也可以是与处理器集成在一起，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
在本申请实施例中，可以将具有收发功能的天线和射频电路视为终端设备的收发单元， 将具有处理功能的处理器视为终端设备的处理单元。如图22所示，终端设备包括收发单元2210和处理单元2220。收发单元也可以称为收发器、收发机、收发装置等。处理单元也可以称为处理器，处理单板，处理模块、处理装置等。可选的，可以将收发单元2210中用于实现接收功能的器件视为接收单元，将收发单元2210中用于实现发送功能的器件视为发送单元，即收发单元2210包括接收单元和发送单元。收发单元有时也可以称为收发机、收发器、或收发电路等。接收单元有时也可以称为接收机、接收器、或接收电路等。发送单元有时也可以称为发射机、发射器或者发射电路等。
应理解，收发单元2210用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的发送操作和接收操作，处理单元2220用于执行上述方法实施例中终端设备上除了收发操作之外的其他操作。
例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图4所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S402和S403，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图4所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S401、S404和S405，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图5所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S501和S502，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图5所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S503～S505，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图6所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S601，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图6所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S602～S604，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图7所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S701，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图7所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S702，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图8所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S802、S804、S805、S807、S810和S811，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图8所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S801、S803、S806、S808和S809，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图9所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S902、S904、S905、S906、S908、S911、S914和S915，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如S901、S903、S907、S909、S910、S912和S913，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图10所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S1001、S1007和S1009，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图10所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如以第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
又例如，在一种实现方式中，收发单元2210用于执行图11所示的实施例中终端设备的全部发送操作和接收操作，例如S1101、S1107、S1109和S1111，和/或收发单元2210还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。处理单元2220，用于执行图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的除了收发操作之外的全部操作，例如以第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态，和/或处理单元2220还用于执行支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
当该通信装置为芯片类的装置或者电路时，该装置可以包括收发单元和处理单元。其中，所述收发单元可以是输入输出电路和/或通信接口；处理单元为集成的处理器或者微处理器或者集成电路。
本实施例中的通信装置为终端设备时，可以参照图23所示的设备。作为一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图13中处理器1310的功能。或者，作为一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图15中处理器1510的功能。或者，作为一个例子，该设备可以完成类似于图21中处理器2110的功能。在图23中，该设备包括处理器2310，发送数据处理器2320，接收数据处理器2330。上述实施例中的处理模块1210可以是图23中的该处理器2310，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块1220可以是图23中的发送数据处理器2320，和/或接收数据处理器2330。或者，上述实施例中的处理模块1410可以是图23中的该处理器2310，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块1420可以是图23中的发送数据处理器2320，和/或接收数据处理器2330。或者，上述实施例中的处理模块2010可以是图23中的该处理器2310，并完成相应的功能；上述实施例中的收发模块2020可以是图23中的发送数据处理器2320，和/或接收数据处理器2330。虽然图23中示出了信道编码器、信道解码器，但是可以理解这些模块并不对本实施例构成限制性说明，仅是示意性的。
图24示出本实施例的另一种形式。处理装置2400中包括调制子***、中央处理子***、周边子***等模块。本实施例中的通信装置可以作为其中的调制子***。具体的，该调制子***可以包括处理器2403，接口2404。其中，处理器2403完成上述处理模块1210的功能，接口2404完成上述收发模块1220的功能。或者，处理器2403完成上述处理模块1410的功能，接口2404完成上述收发模块1420的功能。或者，处理器2403完成上述处理模块2010的功能，接口2404完成上述收发模块2020的功能。作为另一种变形，该调制子***包括存储器2406、处理器2403及存储在存储器2406上并可在处理器上运行的程序，该处理器2403执行该程序时实现上述方法实施例中终端设备侧的方法。需要注意的是，所述存储器2406可以是非易失性的，也可以是易失性的，其位置可以位于调制子***内部，也可以位于处理装置2400中，只要该存储器2406可以连接到所述处理器2403即可。
本申请实施例中的装置为网络设备时，该装置可以如图25所示。装置2500包括一个或多个射频单元，如远端射频单元(remote radio unit,RRU)2510和一个或多个基带单元 (baseband unit，BBU)(也可称为数字单元，digital unit，DU)2520。所述RRU 2510可以称为收发模块，与图16中的收发模块1610对应，或者，所述RRU 2510可以与图18中的收发模块1810对应。可选地，该收发模块还可以称为收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等等，其可以包括至少一个天线2511和射频单元2512。所述RRU 2510部分主要用于射频信号的收发以及射频信号与基带信号的转换，例如用于向终端设备发送指示信息。所述BBU 2510部分主要用于进行基带处理，对基站进行控制等。所述RRU 2510与BBU 2520可以是物理上设置在一起，也可以物理上分离设置的，即分布式基站。
所述BBU 2520为基站的控制中心，也可以称为处理模块，可以与图16中的处理模块1620对应，或者可以与图18中的处理模块1820对应，主要用于完成基带处理功能，如信道编码，复用，调制，扩频等等。例如所述BBU(处理模块)可以用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程，例如，生成上述指示信息等。
在一个示例中，所述BBU 2520可以由一个或多个单板构成，多个单板可以共同支持单一接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络)，也可以分别支持不同接入制式的无线接入网(如LTE网络，5G网络或其他网络)。所述BBU 2520还包括存储器2521和处理器2522。所述存储器2521用以存储必要的指令和数据。所述处理器2522用于控制基站进行必要的动作，例如用于控制基站执行上述方法实施例中关于网络设备的操作流程。所述存储器2521和处理器2522可以服务于一个或多个单板。也就是说，可以每个单板上单独设置存储器和处理器。也可以是多个单板共用相同的存储器和处理器。此外每个单板上还可以设置有必要的电路。
本申请实施例提供第一通信***。该通信***可以包括至少一个上述的图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的终端设备。终端设备例如为图12中的通信装置1200或图13中的通信装置1300。例如，终端设备可用于执行图4所示的实施例至图7所示的实施例中的任一个实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部操作，例如：图4所示的实施例中的S401～S405，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图5所示的实施例中的S501～S505，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图6所示的实施例中的S601～S604，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图7所示的实施例中的S701～S702，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
本申请实施例提供第二通信***。该通信***可以包括至少一个上述的图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的终端设备，以及包括至少一个上述的图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的接入网设备。终端设备例如为图14中的通信装置1400或图15中的通信装置1500，接入网设备例如为图16中的通信装置1600或图17中的通信装置1700。例如，终端设备可用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部操作，例如：图8所示的实施例中的S801～S811，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图9所示的实施例中的S901～S915，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。接入网设备可用于执行图8所示的实施例或图9所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部操作，例如：图8所示的实施例中的S801～S805、S807、S810和S811，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图9所示的实施例中的S901～S906、S908、S911、S914和S915，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
本申请实施例提供第三通信***。该通信***可以包括至少一个上述的图10所示的 实施例或图11所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的终端设备，以及包括至少一个上述的图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中的任一个实施例所涉及的接入网设备。终端设备例如为图20中的通信装置2000或图21中的通信装置2100，接入网设备例如为图18中的通信装置1800或图19中的通信装置1900。例如，终端设备可用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由终端设备所执行的全部操作，例如：图10所示的实施例中的S1001、S1007、S1009、以及以第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态的操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图11所示的实施例中的S1101、S1107、S1109、S1111、以及以第一用户身份从RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态进入RRC连接态的操作，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。接入网设备可用于执行图10所示的实施例或图11所示的实施例中由接入网设备所执行的全部操作，例如：图10所示的实施例中的S1001～S1003以及S1005～S1009，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程；或者，图11所示的实施例中的S1101～S1103以及S1005～S1011，和/或用于支持本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
如上的三个通信***可以是同一通信***，或者也可以分别是不同的通信***。或者，也可能其中的任意两个通信***是同一个通信***，而另一个通信***是不同的通信***。例如，如上的第一通信***和第二通信***是同一通信***，而第三通信***是不同的通信***，或者例如，第二通信***和第三通信***是同一通信***，而第一通信***是不同的通信***，等等。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图7所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图8所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图10所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算 机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图11所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图8所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图10所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图11所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图4所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图5所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图6所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图7所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图8所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图10所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图11所示的实施例中与终端设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图8所示的实 施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图9所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图10所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，所述计算机程序产品用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序被计算机执行时，所述计算机可以实现上述方法实施例提供的图11所示的实施例中与接入网设备相关的流程。
应理解，本申请实施例中提及的处理器可以是CPU，还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
还应理解，本申请实施例中提及的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM，DR RAM)。
需要说明的是，当处理器为通用处理器、DSP、ASIC、FPGA或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件时，存储器(存储模块)集成在处理器中。
应注意，本文描述的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解，在本申请的各种实施例中，上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后，各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定，而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的***、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的***、装置和方法，可以通 过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个***，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此，本申请实施例的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (37)

  1. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于终端设备，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，所述方法包括：
    以所述第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以所述第二用户身份驻留在所述第一小区；
    确定更换服务小区到第二小区；
    以所述第一用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区；
    其中，所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属公共陆地移动网络PLMN相同。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
    通过小区选择过程或小区重选过程，确定驻留到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于无线资源控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述小区重选过程是根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行的，其中所述第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息是根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和/或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息来确定的，
    所述第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息；
    所述第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，确定更换服务小区到第二小区，包括：
    以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态、RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述方法还包括：
    停止以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述方法还包括：
    当以所述第二用户身份进入RRC连接态时，以所述第二用户身份与所述第二小区建立连接。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态，
    所述第一消息携带第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示将所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区。
  8. 根据权利要求4或7所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所 述第二用户身份的标识；和/或，
    以所述第二用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第一用户身份的标识；
    其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
  9. 根据权利要求1～8任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向核心网设备发送第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
  10. 根据权利要求1～9任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述核心网设备的第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份总是具有相同的服务小区。
  11. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接收来自第一用户身份的终端设备的第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为对应于第二用户身份的标识，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份，所述终端设备以第二用户身份处于无线资源控制RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态；
    根据所述第二标识确定所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于所述终端设备；
    将所述第二标识发送给网络设备，所述第二标识用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备驻留在所述接入网设备下的小区。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
    根据所述第二标识，确定所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备当前驻留的小区是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区；
    只在所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备所在的服务小区发送所述寻呼消息。
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述网络设备的寻呼消息，所述寻呼消息包括所述第二标识；
    根据所述第二标识，确定所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文信息；
    向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达。
  14. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述网络设备的针对第一用户身份的N2消息，所述N2消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达；
    向所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备发送RRC消息，所述RRC消息用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备进入RRC连接态，或指示所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备有寻呼消息到达。
  15. 根据权利要求11～14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC空闲态时，所述网络设备是所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的服务核心网设备；
    当所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备处于RRC非激活态时，所述网络设备是存储所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备的上下文的接入网设备。
  16. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，所述方法适用于终端设备，所述终端设备支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，所述方法包括：
    以所述第一用户身份从第一小区进入RRC连接态；
    以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置；
    以所述第一用户身份根据所述第一配置收发数据或者执行测量，所述第一配置为所述第二用户身份使用的配置；
    其中，以所述第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
  19. 根据权利要求16～18任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述接入网设备的第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置；
    基于所述第三消息修改所述第一配置，以及，以所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份根据修改后的第一配置收发数据或者执行测量。
  20. 一种通信方法，其特征在于，包括：
    确定终端设备以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态，其中，所述终端设备支持所述第一用户身份和第二用户身份；
    向所述第一用户身份的终端设备发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述第一用户身份的所述终端设备的第二消息，所述第二消息包括所述第二用户身份的标识，用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备。
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二消息还包括第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于所述第一用户身份请求共享使用所述第二用户身份所使用的配置。
  23. 根据权利要求20～22任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    向所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份的所述终端设备发送第三消息，所述第三消息用于修改所述第一配置。
  24. 根据权利要求20～23任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    确定所述终端设备以所述第一用户身份或所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到第二小区；
    向第一接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个终端设备，所述第一接入网设备为所述第二小区所属的接入网设备。
  25. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份， 所述通信装置包括：
    通信接口，用于与其他装置进行通信；
    处理器，用于以所述第一用户身份驻留在第一小区，以及，以所述第二用户身份驻留在所述第一小区，确定更换服务小区到第二小区，以所述第一用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，以及，以第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份的归属PLMN相同。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理器用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区：
    通过小区选择过程或小区重选过程，确定驻留到所述第二小区，其中，所述通信装置以所述第一用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
  27. 根据权利要求26所述的通信装置，其特征在于，
    所述小区重选过程是根据第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息来进行的，其中所述第三专用小区重选优先级配置信息是根据第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息和/或第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息来确定的，
    所述第一专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第一用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息；
    所述第二专用小区重选优先级配置信息用于配置当以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选时的优先级信息。
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述处理器用于通过如下方式确定更换服务小区到第二小区：
    以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示更换服务小区到所述第二小区，其中，所述通信装置以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态，以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态、RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述处理器，还用于停止以所述第二用户身份进行小区重选或小区选择。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置以所述第二用户身份处于所RRC空闲态或所述RRC非激活态，所述处理器，还用于当以所述第二用户身份进入RRC连接态时，以所述第二用户身份与所述第二小区建立连接。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置以所述第二用户身份处于所述RRC连接态，
    所述第一消息携带第一指示信息，所述第一指示信息用于指示将所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份更换服务小区到所述第二小区。
  32. 根据权利要求28或31所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信接口用于：
    以所述第一用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第二用户身份的标识；和/或，
    以所述第二用户身份向所述接入网设备发送第二指示信息，所述第二指示信息包括所述第一用户身份的标识；
    其中，所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于同一个 终端设备。
  33. 一种接入网设备，其特征在于，包括：
    通信接口，用于接收来自第一用户身份的通信装置的第一消息，所述第一消息携带第二标识，所述第二标识为对应于第二用户身份的标识，所述通信装置支持所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份，所述终端设备以第二用户身份处于RRC空闲态或RRC非激活态，以所述第一用户身份处于RRC连接态；
    处理器，用于根据所述第二标识确定所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份属于所述终端设备；
    所述通信接口，还用于将所述第二标识发送给网络设备，所述第二标识用于指示所述第二用户身份的所述通信装置驻留在所述接入网设备下的小区。
  34. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，所述通信装置支持第一用户身份和第二用户身份，所述通信装置包括：
    处理器，用于以所述第一用户身份从第一小区进入RRC连接态；
    通信接口，用于以所述第一用户身份接收来自接入网设备的第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置；
    所述处理器，还用于以所述第一用户身份根据所述第一配置收发数据或者执行测量，所述第一配置为所述第二用户身份使用的配置；
    其中，以所述第二用户身份在第一小区处于RRC连接态。
  35. 一种接入网设备，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器，用于确定通信装置以第一用户身份进入RRC连接态，其中，所述通信装置支持所述第一用户身份和第二用户身份；
    通信接口，用于向所述第一用户身份的通信装置发送第一消息，所述第一消息用于指示所述第一用户身份和所述第二用户身份共享第一配置，所述第一配置包括物理层配置和/或测量配置。
  36. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1～10中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11～15中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求16～19中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求20～24中任意一项所述的方法。
  37. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1～10中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求11～15中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求16～19中任意一项所述的方法，或者使得所述计算机执行如权利要求20～24中任意一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2019/104769 2019-09-06 2019-09-06 一种通信方法、装置及设备 WO2021042387A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/104769 WO2021042387A1 (zh) 2019-09-06 2019-09-06 一种通信方法、装置及设备

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2019/104769 WO2021042387A1 (zh) 2019-09-06 2019-09-06 一种通信方法、装置及设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021042387A1 true WO2021042387A1 (zh) 2021-03-11

Family

ID=74852667

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/104769 WO2021042387A1 (zh) 2019-09-06 2019-09-06 一种通信方法、装置及设备

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2021042387A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11792712B2 (en) 2021-12-23 2023-10-17 T-Mobile Usa, Inc. Cell reselection priority assignment based on performance triggers

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101247591A (zh) * 2007-12-21 2008-08-20 嘉兴闻泰通讯科技有限公司 双卡双待手机及其sim卡初始化方法
WO2012109830A1 (zh) * 2011-06-08 2012-08-23 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 多卡多待终端及其同步方法和装置
CN106465464A (zh) * 2014-05-30 2017-02-22 苹果公司 支持无线通信设备中多个用户身份并行通信的方法和设备

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101247591A (zh) * 2007-12-21 2008-08-20 嘉兴闻泰通讯科技有限公司 双卡双待手机及其sim卡初始化方法
WO2012109830A1 (zh) * 2011-06-08 2012-08-23 展讯通信（上海）有限公司 多卡多待终端及其同步方法和装置
CN106465464A (zh) * 2014-05-30 2017-02-22 苹果公司 支持无线通信设备中多个用户身份并行通信的方法和设备

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ANONYMOUS: "3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Services and System Aspects; Study on Support for Multi-USIM Devices (Release 17)", 3GPP TR 22.834 V0.1.0, no. V0.1.0, 13 June 2019 (2019-06-13), pages 1 - 19, XP051754095 *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11792712B2 (en) 2021-12-23 2023-10-17 T-Mobile Usa, Inc. Cell reselection priority assignment based on performance triggers

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220078876A1 (en) Indicating ran notification area update (rnau) in rrc_inactive state
CN109923912B (zh) 一种传输寻呼消息的方法及装置
EP3806505A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus, and storage medium
EP4277404A2 (en) Technologies for nr coverage enhancement
WO2022037706A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN110754121A (zh) Ran区域id配置
US20230336961A1 (en) Methods and terminal devices for enhanced discovery procedure
WO2021051364A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及设备
CN113810964B (zh) 一种通信方法及设备
WO2021000688A1 (zh) 一种发送、接收能力信息的方法及设备
CN115707036A (zh) 传输数据的方法和装置
US20220264392A1 (en) Rrc connection resume method and device
US20220303833A1 (en) Relation indication for multi-sim devices
CN113950146B (zh) 一种寻呼方法和通信装置
CN116671201A (zh) 一种上行参考信号资源的配置方法及相关装置
WO2021042387A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、装置及设备
WO2022061545A1 (zh) 一种通信方法和装置
CN114424637B (zh) 寻呼的方法和装置
US20230125160A1 (en) Sidelink Positioning Architecture for Wireless Communications
WO2023011385A1 (zh) 一种配置参数更新方法及装置
CN118044333A (zh) 无线通信方法、第一终端以及网络设备
CN117729596A (zh) 候选主小区配置信息的处理方法、设备、存储介质及产品
KR20240076845A (ko) 무선 통신들을 위한 사이드링크 포지셔닝 아키텍처
CN115567991A (zh) 传输方式切换的方法和相关装置
CN115707007A (zh) 一种配置参数更新方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19944351

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19944351

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1